PROJECT MANUAL SPECIFICATIONS€¦ · Messiah Lutheran Elevator Addition July 01, 2011 Issued For...

PROJECT MANUAL

SPECIFICATIONS

For

Elevator Addition

To

MESSIAH LUTHERAN

CHURCH & SCHOOL 21485 Lorain Rd

Fairview Park, OH 44126

July 25, 2011

Bidding Documents

Single Contractor Project

Issued by:

Richard Fleischman + Partners Architects, Inc

1020 Huron Road. Suite 101

Cleveland, Ohio 44115

Ph. 216-771-0090

Messiah Lutheran Elevator Addition July 01, 2011

Issued For Bidding

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1

PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 10 00 SOLICITATION A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 20 10 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 41 00 BID FORM A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 SUMMARY 01 23 00 ALTERNATES 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 35 25 FIRE PREVENTION & PROTECTION IN CONSTRUCTION

01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 42 00 REFERENCES 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 59 50 SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 73 50 FIRE PREVENTION PRECAUTIONS FOR HOT WORK 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION


Issued For Bidding


DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 25 20 ANCHORS AND INSERTS 03 30 00 CONCRETE – GENERAL 03 31 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 32 00 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03 51 13 CEMENTITIOUS ROOF DECK 03 60 40 GROUT FOR COLUMN BASES DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 04 05 25 DRAINAGE MAT 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 – METAL 05 10 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 21 00 STEEL JOISTS 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 55 00 3-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 71 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 80 00 GLAZING


Issued For Bidding


DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 30 00 TILE, MORTAR, GROUT, AND WATERPROOFING 09 65 13 RESILIANT BASE 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 66 00 INTERIOR GLASS PARTITION SYSTEMS DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

NOT USED DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

NOT USED

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT USED DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 21 00 ELEVATOR

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

NOT USED


Issued For Bidding


DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR HVAC SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK NOT USED DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS NOT USED DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES NOT USED

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Messiah Lutheran Elevator Addition July 25, 2011 Issued for Bidding

SOLICITATION 00 10 00 - 1

SECTION 00 10 00

SOLICITATION

You are invited to bid on a General Contract for an elevator addition to Messiah Lutheran Church and School in Fairview Park, OH. Bids shall be on a Lump Sum basis; partial or incomplete bids will not be accepted. Project shall be completed within 100 calendar days of the date of award of contract. Sealed Bids will be received until, Monday, August 8, 2011 by 3:00PM at: Richard Fleischman + Partners Architects 1020 Huron Rd., Ste. 101 Cleveland, OH 44115 216-771-0090

• Only written Bids will be accepted. • Bids received after this time will not be accepted.

• Bids will be evaluated by the Church Board of Trustees

Additional copies of Bidding Documents may be obtained by calling SE Blueprint @ 216 241-2250

Sealed bids will be received for a single prime contract. Bid estimate is $200,000. Any corrections, interpretations, clarifications and amendments, as well as any additional provi-sions that the Architect may decide to include, will be issued in writing as addenda to the Con-tract Documents. Only changes issued, as addenda shall be binding. No officer, agent or em-ployee of the Owner is authorized to interpret, correct, clarify or amend the Contract Documents by any other method. Any such interpretation, correction, clarification or amendment, if given, shall not be relied upon by the bidder. Each addendum will be emailed to each bidder and will be on file at the printing company. It shall be the responsibility of each bidder to verify the re-ceipt of all addenda prior to the bid opening. The Owner reserves the unqualified right, in its sole and absolute discretion, to consider infor-mal and reject any bid not prepared or submitted in accordance with the provisions hereof, and reserves the right to waive any informalities in, or to reject any or all bids. Bids that are incom-plete, illegible, unbalanced, or contain any clarifications, deletions, modifications, qualifications, conditions, errors, inconsistencies, ambiguities, additions, erasures, omissions, irregularities or exceptions may be considered informal. Subject to these rights, the Contract will be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder. Once opened, bids shall remain valid for sixty - (60) calendar days. Within ten days after the contract award, the Architect will release the re-maining amount deposited by bidders. This Project is tax exempt. This is not a prevailing wage project. Minority and local participation is encouraged.


SOLICITATION 00 10 00 - 2

Questions by prospective bidders should be directed to Aaron Hill of Richard Fleischman + Partners Architects by email at [email protected]. A pre-bid meeting and walk-though will be held at the project site, (21485 Lorain Road, Fairview Park, Ohio 44126) on Monday, August 1, 2011 at 9:00am.

END OF SECTION 00 10 00


SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00 20 10 - 1

SECTION 00 20 10


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS The Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701, 1997 Edition, are hereby

modified as described in the following Articles. Where any such Article is amended, voided, or superseded thereby, the provisions of such Article not so specifically amended, voided, or superseded shall remain in effect. Where any such Article is supplemented, the provisions of such Article shall remain in effect and all supplemental provisions shall be considered as added thereto.

PART 2 - BIDDERS REPRESENTATIONS 2.1.3 ADD THE FOLLOWING SUB-PARAGRAPHS All Bidders shall visit the site of the proposed work during the bidding period and

shall inform themselves of all local conditions bearing on transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials; other work being performed; accessibility and general character of the site; and extent of existing work within or adjacent thereto.

The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive or examine any forms,

instruments, or documents, or to visit the site and acquaint him with conditions there existing, shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation with respect to his/her Bid.

PART 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1.1 SUPPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING

One hardcopy set of bidding documents will be available to Bidders at no cost. Additional sets may be purchased at bidders expense, from: SE Blueprint Inc. @ 216-241-2250

Digital files (PDF’s) of the bidding documents will also be made available to Bidders via the architects ftp site.

3.1.2 SUPPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING The Bidding Documents consist of all items listed in the table of contents. It is

the responsibility of each subcontractor to review each document in detail for work of his trade and how the work of other trades affects his work.



00 20 10 - 2

PART 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1.5 SUPPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING

The bidder must include all alternates on the proposal Form, if applicable. Failure to comply may be cause of rejection.

4.2.2 SUPPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING Each proposal much be accompanied by a 100% Bid Guaranty and Contract

Bond conforming to Section 153.54 of the Ohio Revised Code, or a 100% Bid Bond. The successful bidder must provide a Labor Material Payment Bond and Performance Bond to conform to the requirements of the State of Ohio.

4.3.1 SUPPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING

Submit Bids on or Before: Time: 3:00 PM EST Day: Monday Date: August 8, 2011

At: Richard Fleischman + Partners Architects 1020 Huron Rd, Ste. 101 Cleveland, OH 44115

4.3.1.2 A Pre-Bid Conference will be held as follows:

Time: 9:00 AM EST Day: Monday Date: August 1, 2011 Location: Messiah Lutheran Church & School 21485 Lorain Rd Fairview Park, Ohio 44126

PART 5 – CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.2 ADD THE FOLLOWING SUB-PARAGRAPHS

Bids must include all alternates, if any that are applicable to the work. Failure to comply may be the cause of rejection. No segregated proposals or assignments will be considered. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, and shall have no liability whatsoever to any Bidder whose Bid is not accepted.



00 20 10 - 3

PART 9 – SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS The following Items shall be added to the Instructions to Bidders 9.1 TAXES, FEES

Proposals submitted shall include all applicable fees. This Project is a tax-exempt project. The Owner will distribute tax-exempt forms to the successful bidder.

9.2 TIME OF COMPLETION

Bidders are cautioned to be aware of the time of completion stated on the Bid Form. If awarded a contract for the work, the successful bidder shall be expected to complete the work within the time limit they state on the Bid Form.



BID FORM 00 41 00 - 1

Bids shall be received by Richard Fleischman + Partners Architects, 1020 Huron Rd, Ste. 101, Cleveland, OH 44115, for the:

Messiah Lutheran Church & School Elevator Addition

at

21485 Lorain Road Fairview Park, OH 44126

The time for Contract Completion is 100 consecutive days from the Notice to Proceed. The bidder has received the following Addenda:

Addendum Number Date Received


BID FORM 00 41 00 - 2

Having examined the contract documents prepared by Richard Fleischman + Partners Architects, Inc., for the construction of said project, and having inspected the site of, and related affecting and governing conditions, we hereby propose to furnish all materials, labor and services required to complete the work specified and described in the Project Manual and Drawings, within the allotted construction time, for consideration of the following stipulated sum: BASE BID (ALLTRADES) – ONE CONTRACTOR (GENERAL) ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS, for the sum of $__________________________________

Sum in words: _______________________________________________________dollars.

ALTERNATE 1, Interior Glass Partition Wall

If Alternate is accepted, ADD to Base Bid: $ _____________________________________

Sum in words:_______________________________________________________dollars.

ALTERNATE 2, Cross on Elevator Tower

If Alternate is accepted, ADD to Base Bid: $ _____________________________________ Sum in words:_______________________________________________________dollars.

ALTERNATE 3, Entrance Canopy

If Alternate is accepted, ADD to Base Bid: $_____________________________________ Sum in words:_______________________________________________________dollars.

ALTERNATE 4, W 215th St. Concrete Ramp

If Alternate is accepted, ADD to Base Bid: $_____________________________________

Sum in words:_______________________________________________________dollars.

Bidder’s Authorized Signature: Please print or type the following:

Name of Bidder’s Authorized Signatory

Title:

Company Name:

UC Project No. 06040C Morgens Hall Renovation

2010 Edition (Oct 2010) Bid Form M140-01-00 41 00-BF Page 00 41 00-3

BIDDER'S CERTIFICATIONS The Bidder hereby acknowledges that the following representations in this Bid are material and not mere recitals: 1. The Bidder has read and understands the proposed Contract Documents and agrees to

comply with all requirements of the proposed Contract Documents, regardless of whether the Bidder has actual knowledge of the requirements and regardless of any statement or omission made by the Bidder which might indicate a contrary intention.

2. The Bidder represents that the Bid is based upon the Basis of Design and Acceptable

Components specified by the proposed Contract Documents. 3. The Bidder has visited the Site, become familiar with local conditions, and has correlated

personal observations about the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidder has no outstanding questions regarding the interpretation or clarification of the proposed Contract Documents.

4. The Bidder and each Person signing on behalf of the Bidder certifies, and in the case of a Bid

by a joint venture each member thereof certifies as to such member’s entity, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of the undersigned's knowledge and belief: (a) the Base Bid, any Unit Prices, and any Alternate bid in the Bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition as to any matter relating to such Base Bid, Unit Prices or Alternate bid with any other Bidder; (b) unless otherwise required by law, the Base Bid, any Unit Prices and any Alternate bid in the Bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the Bidder and shall not knowingly be disclosed by the Bidder prior to the bid opening, directly or indirectly, to any other Bidder who would have any interest in the Base Bid, Unit Prices or Alternate bid; (c) no attempt has been made or shall be made by the Bidder to induce any other Person to submit or not to submit a Bid for the purpose of restricting competition.

5. The Bidder shall execute the Contract Form with the Contracting Authority, if a Contract is

awarded on the basis of this Bid, and if the Bidder does not execute the Contract Form for any reason, other than as authorized by law, the Bidder and the Bidder's Surety are liable to the State as provided in Article 5 of the Instructions to Bidders.

6. The Bidder certifies that the upon the award of a Contract, as the Contractor it shall make a

good faith effort to ensure that all of the Contractor’s employees, while working on the Site, shall not purchase, transfer, use, or possess illegal drugs or alcohol or abuse prescription drugs in any way.

7. The Bidder acknowledges that it read all of the Instructions to Bidders, and by submitting its

Bid certifies that it has read the Instructions to Bidders and it understands and agrees to the terms and conditions stated in them.

8. The Bidder agrees to furnish any information requested by the Contracting Authority or the

Architect/Engineer to evaluate the responsibility of the Bidder. 9. The Bidder agrees to furnish the submittals required by Instructions to Bidders Paragraph 6.1

for execution of the Contract Form within 10 days of the date of the Notice of Intent to Award.


BID FORM 00 41 00 - 4

10. When the Bidder is a corporation, partnership or sole proprietorship, an officer, partner or principal of the Bidder, as applicable, shall print or type the legal name of the Bidder on the line provided, and sign the Bid Form.

11. When the Bidder is a joint venture, an officer, partner or principal, as applicable, of each

member of the joint venture shall print or type the legal name of the applicable member on the line provided, and sign the Bid Form.

12. Bidder acknowledges that by signing the Bid Form on the Bidder Signature and Information

Form on the following page that it is signing the actual Bid and when submitted as a part of its bid package, shall serve as the Bidder’s authorization for the further consideration and activity in the bidding and contract process.

13. All signatures must be original.

END OF DOCUMENT


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

00 73 00 - 1

SECTION 00 73 00


INTRODUCTION

The following supplements modify the “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,” AIA Document A201-1997. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.

ARTICLE 2 - OWNER

Add the following subparagraph 2.2.3:

2.2.3.1 The location, type, quantity, and additional information concerning underground utilities shown on the Survey or Contract Drawings is approximate, and is in no way complete. This is general information only and shall not be taken or interpreted by the Contractor or any Subcontractor as prima-facie evidence of completeness.

Replace paragraph 2.2.5 with the following:

2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished free of charge 10 copies of Contract Drawings and Project Manual. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage and handling.

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR

Add the following subparagraph to 3.4:

3.3.4 All Contractors and subcontractors employed upon the work shall be required to conform to the Labor Laws of the State of Ohio and the various Acts amendatory and supplementary thereto and to all other codes, laws, ordinances and legal requirements applicable thereto.

Add the following subparagraphs to 3.12:

3.12.11 Each Contractor furnishing equipment for this project shall obtain exact dimensions at the building. Scale or figure dimensions on the Drawings and details show the correct size under ideal conditions and shall not, under any circumstances, be so construed as to relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for taking measurements at the building and furnishing material of the correct size.

3.12.12 The Architect's approval of Shop Drawings shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the project and general detailing. The Architect shall not be responsible for dimensions, or quantities and his checking and approval shall not in any way take the place of the Contractor's checking. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions with field conditions.



00 73 00 - 2

ARTICLE 4 – ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS

Add the following subparagraph to 5.2.1:

5.2.1.1 List of entities to be submitted within 30 days of Notice to Proceed.

ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK

Add the following subparagraphs 7.1:

7.1.4 The allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner shall not exceed the following:

.1 For the Contractor for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 15% of the cost.

.2 For the Contractor for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractors, 5% of the amount due the Subcontractor.

.3 For each Subcontractor involved Work performed by that Subcontractor's own forces, 15% of the cost.

.4 For each subcontractor involved Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub-subcontractor, 5% of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor.

.5 Cost of the work to which overhead and profit is to apply is (a) the cost of materials and the cost of delivery, (b) the cost of labor including fringe benefits, social security, old age and unemployment insurance and worker's compensation insurance, and (c) the rental value of equipment and machines.

.6 Overhead shall include (a) bond if required and paid for by the Owner, and insurance premiums, (b) supervision and superintendence, (c) wages of time keepers, watchmen and clerks, (d) small tools, (e) incidentals, (f) general office expense and (g) all other expenses not included in the cost of the work.

.7 All proposals except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including unit costs of the major items of material, labor hours, labor costs per hour, equipment and subcontractors. All proposals shall give adequate detail so that the Architect and Owner can determine if these charges are reasonable and fair.

ARTICLE 8 - TIME


8.1.2.1 The date of Commencement of the work is the date established by the Owner's written Notice to Proceed or executed Contract.


8.2.1.1 All time limits indicated by the Contractor on the Bid Form and in the Contract Documents are of the essence. The time of completion is a binding part of the Contract upon which the Owner may rely in planning the use of the facility.



00 73 00 - 3

ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION


9.2.1.1 Schedule of Values to be submitted within 10 days after Notice to Proceed.


9.3.1.1 The Owner will pay 90% of the portion of the Contract Sum allocatable to labor, materials, and equipment incorporated in the work and also for materials and equipment suitably stored at the site or at some other location agreed upon in writing for the period covered by the Application for Payment.


9.6.1.1 Contractor's Application for payment shall be submitted monthly on AIA Document G702, G702A, and G703.

Add the following subparagraphs to 9.8:

9.8.6. Following items shall be submitted to the Owner, through the Architect, along with Certificates of Substantial Completion AIA Document G704 for the Owner's Acceptance.

.1 Complete set of all warranties, guarantees, maintenance and operation manuals required by the Contract Documents, properly bound and indexed.

.2 Comprehensive list of the names, addresses, contact persons and a description of the work or equipment furnished by each sub-contractor and major equipment supplier.

.3 Complete set of as-built drawings indicating all changes made during construction.

ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY


10.2.2.1 The provisions of the Federal Construction Safety Act and the Occupational Safety and Health Act are hereby made a part of these Specifications.

ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS

Add the following subparagraphs to 11.1

11.1 For the duration of this Contract, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall carry Liability Insurance in accordance with all the requirements described in Paragraph 3.18 and 11.1.

The Contractor shall submit one copy of Worker's Compensation Certificate to the Owner and one copy to the Architect prior to the commencement of the work.

The Contractor shall submit Certificates of Contractor's Liability Insurance to the Owner for approval and obtain approval prior to the commencement of the work.



00 73 00 - 4

The Messiah Lutheran Church and School which includes the Caledonia and North Branches shall all be named as additional insured on the required Liability Insurance policies and shall contain an endorsement so stating said fact.

The Contractor shall submit copies of Certificates of Contractor's Liability Insurance, that have been approved by the Owner, to the Architect for his files together with a written Statement that the Certificates of Insurance have been approved by and are acceptable to the Owner. Certificates of Insurance shall be submitted on AIA Document G705 Certificate for Insurance.

Unless otherwise directed by the Owner in writing, the Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the adequacy of the insurance carried by each of his Subcontractor's Insurance Certificates with the Owner and the Architect prior to the respective Subcontractor's participation in the work.

The Architect shall not be responsible for the checking and/or approving the Contractor and Subcontractor's Liability Insurance Certificates. The Owner's Insurance Counsel shall check the Insurance Certificates to determine their adequacy in complying with Specification Requirements. It is the Owner's responsibility to determine whether the information contained in the Certificates of Insurance is adequate and acceptable.

The Contractor and all Subcontractors agree to indemnity and hold harmless the Owner and Architect from any liability, damages, penalties or expenses arising out of or in connection with the violation of, or non-compliance with, the Federal Construction Safety Act and the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and any other applicable Federal or Ohio Laws.

Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph:

11.1.2 The Contractor shall protect the Owner against all claims arising from the use of passenger automobiles, trucks, and other vehicles or equipment owned or operated by the Contractor in connection with the work specified. Minor claims or damages not covered by insurance shall be settled by the Contractor within 30 days of the claim.

The Contractor assumes all risks of damage or injuries including death to any property or persons, wherever located, resulting from any action, omission or operations under the Contract or in connection with the work.

The Contractor shall indemnity, hold harmless, and defend the Owner and his representatives from any losses, damage, expenses, claims, suits and demands of any nature resulting from the damages or injuries, including death to any property or persons caused by or arising from the Contractor's employees, agents, subcontractors, representatives, or any other person.

The Contractor shall not indemnify the Owner for any damage or injuries, including death, to any property or persons caused solely and exclusively by negligence of the Owner or his representatives.

The Contractor's Liability Insurance shall be in not less than the following amounts:

Certificate of Insurance shall designate Messiah Lutheran Church and School as additionally insured.



00 73 00 - 5

Worker’s Compensation Statutory for the

State of Operation Bodily Injury Each Accident

Employer’s Liability $500,000 Bodily Injury Each Accident

Contractor’s Bodily Injury $1,000,000 Bodily Injury Each Occurrence

$1,000,000 Property Damage Each Accident

$1,000,000 Property Damage Aggregate

Contractor’s Protective Bodily Injury Liability & Property Damage

$1,000,000 Bodily Injury Each Occurrence

$1,000,000 Property Damage Each Accident

$1,000,000 Property Damage Aggregate

Automobile Bodily Injury Liability & Property Damage

$1,000,000 Bodily Injury Each Occurrence

Liability, Including Owned, Non-owned, and Hired Vehicles

$250,000 Property Damage Each Accident

Umbrella Policy $5,000,000 Add the following paragraph to the General Conditions:

The Contractor agrees that (i) neither the Contractor, nor its subrogee or surety (collectively 'the Contractor'), will bring any civil suit, action or other proceeding in law, equity, or arbitration against the Architect or the officer, employees, agents, and servants of the Architect, for or on account of any cause of action which the Contractor may have arising out of or in any manner connected with the Project, and (ii) the Architect will not bring any civil suit, action, or other proceeding in law, equity, or arbitration against the Contractor or the officers, employees, agents, and servants of the Contractor, for or on account of any cause or action which the Architect may have arising out of or in any manner connected with the Project.

The Owner shall carry “all-risk” property insurance as stated in Article 11.4.1. However, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractors to carry insurance on their respective materials, tools, or other equipment owned by them or their employees which will not become an integral part or consumed in the construction of the project.

ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

Add the following subparagraphs to 13.5.

13.5.1 Tests and inspections will be paid for by the Owner, Contractorwill be responsible for scheduling and coordinating all tests required by the contract and agencies having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall bear costs for retesting or re-inspection resulting from failure of initial tests or due to ill-timed notices.



SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Permits. 4. Access to site. 5. Coordination with occupants. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions. 8. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: MESSIAH LUTHERAN CHURCH and SCHOOL ELEVATOR ADDITION AND RENOVATION.

1. Project Location: 21485 Lorain Road Fairview Park, OH 44126.

B. Owner: Messiah Lutheran Church & School. Phone: 440-331-2405

1. Owner's Representative: Phil Bartels, Trustee. Phone: 440-785-6615.

C. Architect: Richard Fleischman + Partners Architects, Inc. 1020 Huron Road Suite 101. Cleveland Ohio 44115. Phone: 216-771-0090

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2

1. Structural Engineers: Peller & Associates, Inc. 842 Corporate Way Ste 820. Westlake, Oh 44145. Phone: 440-899-1611

2. Mechanical, Electrical, & Plumbing Engineers: Austrian & Associates, Inc. 2530 Superior Ave. Ste. 202. Cleveland, OH 44114. Phone: 216-621-6631

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. The project consists of an elevator addition to the existing 2,300 sq. ft., concrete block and steel frame entrance commons addition on the east side of the education and church building, built in 1991. Construction Classification 2B, Non Sprinkled, 36 feet Height with 4 elevator stops.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 PERMITS

A. Owner to reimburse Contractor for cost of City of Fairview Park Building Permit at cost with no markup. Cost of permit is not to be included in Contractors formal bid. The reimbursed cost does not include mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical and signage permits required by the city of Fairview Park.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work.

B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to Entrance Commons as indicated on drawings.

2. Limits: Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet (12.2 m) beyond building perimeter; 10 feet (3 m) beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter; 15 feet (4.5 m) beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet (7.6 m) beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 3

fields) that require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area.

3. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

D. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building(s) during entire construction period with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy.

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 4

1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Work in the existing building may occur anytime, except for the following restricted hours:

1. Restricted Work Hours: During worship services, Saturday between 5:00pm – 7:00pm and Sunday between 8:00am – 1:00pm. Other events creating restricted hours, such as weddings or funerals may occur, in which the owner will give the contractor advanced notice of such.

2. Restricted Hours for Utility Shutdowns: During school hours, Monday – Friday 7:00am – 4:00pm, and worship service hours listed above.

3. Restricted Hours for Excessively Noisy Activity: Activities such as saw-cutting or core-drilling of concrete slabs should occur outside of school hours.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

G. Employee Identification: Owner will provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

H. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.


SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 5

1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.



ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1

SECTION 01 23 00

ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.


ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 2

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: Provide Interior Glass Partition Wall at the Ground Floor.

B. Alternate No. 2: Provide Aluminum Fabricated Cross at the Elevator Tower.

C. Alternate No. 3: Construct new Canopy at the entrance located at the rear parking lot

D. Alternate No. 4: Construct new concrete ramp at the W 215th Street entrance.



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1

SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 01 23 00 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the

following, as applicable:



a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and

interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from ICC-ES . j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.



1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction

schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities

having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the

Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


Messiah Lutheran Elevator Addition July 01, 2011 Issued For Bidding

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's

construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:



a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G70. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate

the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to

nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work

where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.



10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the end of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included in Project Manual.

F. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.

G. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.



2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

H. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

I. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

J. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

K. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.



1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

L. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

M. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

N. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and

proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."



7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar

data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation

and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.



B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.



2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Project closeout activities. 7. Startup and adjustment of systems.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions

that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical



Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:



1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings.

2. File Preparation Format: AutoCad.DWG Version 2004 operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.

3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format.

4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings.

b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in AutoCad 2004. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of

AIA Document C106

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts

the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product

Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.



C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B.

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.



1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their

consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.



x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Progress Meetings: Architect will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each

contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.



4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.





SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

4. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's] responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.



D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.



b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad version 2004.

c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement

d. Digital data drawing files will made available via Architects FTP site. e. The following digital data files will be furnished for each appropriate

discipline:

1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's

consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.



2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810. b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the

following information:

1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Construction Manager. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 10) Category and type of submittal.



11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic

name for each of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name

for each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks.



5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent

of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's

action stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site specifically established for Project.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.



a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

3. Action Submittals: Submit 3 paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return 2 copies.

4. Informational Submittals: Submit 2 paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on

accompanying Shop Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect

will return 2 copies.



C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. b. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one

copy. c. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will retain 2 copies;

remainder will be returned.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.



a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated.

Architect will return two copies.



F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:



1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

V. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.



3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.



FIRE PREVENTION & PROTECTION IN CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATION, AND DEMOLITION 01 35 25-1

SECTION 01 35 25

FIRE PREVENTION & PROTECTION IN CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATION, AND DEMOLITION PROJECTS

PART 1-GENERAL

1.1 Scope

A. This specification shall apply to structures in the course of construction, alteration, or demolition, including those in underground locations.

1.2 Purpose

A. This specification is intended to prescribe minimum safeguards for

construction, alteration, and demolition operations in order to provide reasonable safety to life and property from fire during such operations.

1.3 Application

A. This specification provides measures for preventing or minimizing fire damage during construction, alteration, and demolition operations.

B. Alteration activities shall be permitted to require the use of both the demolition and construction activity requirements, as applicable.

C. A fire safety program shall be included in all construction, alteration, or demolition projects, and the right of the Owner or Owners authorized representative to administer and enforce this program shall be established, even if the building is entirely under the jurisdiction of the contractor.

1.4 Equivalent Technologies

A. Nothing in this specification is intended to prevent the use of systems, methods, or devices of equivalent or superior quality, strength, fire resistance, effectiveness, durability, and safety over those prescribed in this specification. Technical documentation shall be submitted to the Owner and Architect to determine equivalency. The system, method, or device shall be approved for the intended purpose by the Owner prior to being utilized. Systems, methods, or devices that are submitted for review after construction, alteration, or demolition starts, or after the systems, methods, or devices have been used, may be summarily rejected due to contractual considerations and/or technical considerations.



PART 2 – REFERENCES

2.1 Applicable Publications: Perform construction, alteration, and demolition operations in a manner conforming to the requirements of the latest edition of the following publications including all amendments to these publications:

A. International Code Council (ICC):

1. International Building Code 2. International Fire Code 3. International Mechanical Code

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers 2. 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code 3. 51B Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and

Other Hot Work 4. 54 National Fuel Gas Code 5. 58 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code 6. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 7. 72 National Fire Alarm Code 8. 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows

9. 101 Life Safety Code 10. 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 11. 1963 Standard for Fire Hose Connections] C. Code of Federal Regulations

1. 29 CFR, Part 1910: Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) General Industry and Health Standards.

2. 29 CFR, Part 1926: OSHA Construction Industry Standards.

D. Testing Services or Laboratories: Construction shall be done and equipment and materials used that are in accordance with the latest edition of the following publications from Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), or Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM):

1. UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 2. UL Building Materials Directory 3. UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory 4. UL Fire Resistance Directory 5. UL Electrical Construction Materials Directory 6. FM P7825 Approval Guide

E. Acquisition of Publications: . The National Fire Protection Association

publications are available from the NFPA, Quincy, MA 02269 1-800-344-3555 or www.nfpacatalog.org. The International Code Council



Publications are available through the ICC Store 1-800-786-4452 or www.iccsafe.org/store.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 FIRE SAFETY PROGRAM

A. Prior to commencing construction, the Contractor shall appoint an on site fire safety program manager.

B. The fire safety program manager shall have knowledge of the applicable fire protection standards, available fire protection systems, and fire inspection procedures.

C. The fire safety program manager shall assure that all requirements of this specification and of referenced codes and standards are being complied with throughout. This manager shall also have the authority to enforce provisions of this specification to assure compliance herewith.

D. The Contractor's site specific fire safety program shall be reviewed, and implementation of fire safety provisions pertinent to the work shall be discussed. For this reason, a copy of the contractor’s site specific fire safety program shall be provided to the Owner at least 15 days prior to the beginning of construction, alteration, or demolition activities. Refer to paragraphs 1.3.B., 1.3.C and 3.3.A in this section for further information.

E. In case of a conflict between applicable regulations, the more stringent requirements shall apply. Any guidance in regard to interpretation of codes and standards shall be sought from the Owner and Architect. The Owner or Owner’s authorized representative shall make the final decision on the proper compliance with this specification in case of conflicts.

3.2 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS

A. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable codes, standards, and regulations pertaining to the fire and life safety of persons during execution of the work, and shall hold the Owner harmless for any action or omission on the Contractor's part, or that of the Contractor's employees or subcontractors, that results in illness, injury, or death.

B. The Contractor shall have written fire safety programs in compliance with NFPA 241 and the International Fire Code.

C. The Contractor shall provide for required fire department pre-planning, fire department notification procedures and equipment as required by this specification, training of all on site contractor personnel on fire safety procedures, provision of fire extinguishers as required, protection of



existing fire protection equipment and systems, and all other required equipment, procedures, and staff required by codes cited therein.

D. Any contractor found operating outside of the approved fire safety program/plan shall be identified and removed from the project for the duration of the project. The contractor shall have neither extension of schedule nor any additional payment for delays as a result of contract personnel failing to comply with the approved fire protection impairment plan.

3.3 EMERGENCY SUSPENSION OF WORK

A. When the Contractor is notified by the Owner, or the Owner's authorized representative, of non-compliance with the fire safety provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall immediately, unless otherwise instructed, correct the unsafe or unhealthy condition.

B. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly, all or part of the Work will be stopped by notice from the Owner.

C. When, in the opinion of and by notice given by the Owner or the Owners authorized representative, satisfactory corrective action has been taken by the Contractor, work shall resume.

D. The Contractor shall not be allowed any extension of time or compensation for damages in connection with a work stoppage for an unsafe or unhealthy condition.

3.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Fire Safety Programs: The Contractor shall submit, for approval, copies of the project fire safety program, as applicable to the work scope, or required as a result of the fire safety program review, including but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Hot Work procedures. 2. Temporary Heating Equipment. 3. Ban on Smoking in Building and Property and provisions for

smokers. 4. Waste Disposal 6. Flammable and Combustible Liquids and Flammable Gases. 7. Utilities 8. On Site Security 9. Development of prefire plan with the local responding fire

department. 10. Access for the local responding fire department, clear access to

facility fire department connections, and access roadways where required.



11. Rapid communication with everyone within the work site of a fire and evacuation.

12. Protection of existing structures and equipment from exposure fires resulting from construction, alteration, and demolition operations.

13. The inspection/oversight program to assure that elements of the fire safety program are in place and personnel properly trained.

15. Storage procedures to assure that project fire safety systems and procedures are not overwhelmed by an unanticipated fire load.

16. Protection of the occupants, public, visitors, and others not related to operation.

3.5 FIRE AND EXPLOSION REPORTS

A. A copy of each loss report that the Contractor or Subcontractors submits to their insurance carriers as a result of a fire or explosion shall be submitted to the Owner within seven calendar days after the date of the incident.

B. In the event a fire or explosion results in the injury of any individual(s) or the death of any individual(s), the Contractor, shall verbally notify the Owner immediately.

C. In the event a fire or explosion takes place in a construction, alteration, or demolition site, the Contractor shall cooperate with State, and Local fire investigators to determine the cause.

3.6 PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL

A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, occupants, or damage to property of others. The public includes all persons not employed by the Contractor or a subcontractor.

B. Where practical, the work area shall be fenced, barricaded, or otherwise blocked off from the public to prevent unauthorized entry into the work area.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.



D. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

E. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

F. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

G. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

H. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.



2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than 5 days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

C. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

D. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

E. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and

testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies

with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of

product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar



documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.



I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of



Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing

and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at

Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.



1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1

SECTION 01 42 00

REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.



1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and

Transportation Officials (202) 624-5800

www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155



www.abma-dc.org ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 www.concrete.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc.

(The) (205) 257-2530

www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute,

The (703) 524-8800

www.ahrinet.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International,

Inc. (847) 394-0150

www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780-7372



www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural

Engineering Institute

(See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-

Conditioning Engineers (800) 527-4723

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers

International) (973) 882-1170

www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials

International)

www.astm.org ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) 628-6380 www.atis.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA) AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (703) 534-8300 www.awci.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636



www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077 (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association International)

www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555 www.ce.org (703) 907-7600 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919



www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association www.pbmdf.com (703) 724-1128 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org (800) 328-6306 CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 www.csa.ca (416) 747-4000 CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org ECA Electrical Components Association (703)907-8024 www.ec-central.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945



EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-6000 http://content.asce.org/ejcdc/ EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (800) 967-5352 (Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA) www.intertek-etlsemko.com FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning

Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772

www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org (301) 277-8686 GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Part of GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org



GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers

Association (908) 464-8200

Division of Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI)

www.ahrinet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAPSC International Association of Professional Security

Consultants (515) 282-8192

www.iapsc.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org ICPA International Cast Polymer Association (703) 525-0320 www.icpa-hq.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

(The) (212) 419-7900

www.ieee.org IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (703) 525-0320 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510



www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The (919) 549-8411 www.isa.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (801) 341-7360 ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO) ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LGSEA Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association (202) 263-4488 www.arcat.com LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MCA Metal Construction Association (847) 375-4718 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222



www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve

and Fittings Industry Inc. (703) 281-6613

www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal

Manufacturers (630) 942-6591

www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6223 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers

International) (281) 228-6200

www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193,

ext. 453 www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 222-2300 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org



NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers


(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)

www.nofma.org NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals


www.nomma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) 422-4556 www.nwfa.org (636) 519-9663



PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.cee.uiuc.edu PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (248) 848-3180 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com (706) 882-3833 RIS Redwood Inspection Service www.redwoodinspection.com (925) 935-1499 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District (909) 396-2000 www.aqmd.com SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) 542-5040 www.scte.org (610) 363-6888 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424 SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of

Civil Engineers

(See ASCE) SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888 www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075 SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991



www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics

Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)

www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association (847) 681-1868 www.swpa.org TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association (319) 895-6911 www.tilt-up.org TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (914) 332-0040 www.tema.org TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic

Industries Alliance (703) 907-7700

www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org



TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.wcmanet.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door

Association) (312) 321-6802

www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork

Institute of California) (916) 372-9943

www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org



C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V. 49 30 2601-0 www.din.de IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical

Officials (909) 472-4100

www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

COE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011 www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov



GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHR

P National Cooperative Highway Research Program

(See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 http://www.hhs.gov/ophs/ RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 http://gulliver.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 227-8772 www.usp.org USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253



Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil/ Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dsp.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject



to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home

Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (800) 952-5210

www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-2041 CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6815 www.calregs.com CDHS California Department of Health Services (916) 445-4171 www.dhcs.ca.gov CDPH California Department of Public Health, Indoor Air Quality Section www.cal-iaq.org CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782 www.cpuc.ca.gov TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development (979) 458-6606 http://txforestservice.tamu.edu





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.



B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

D. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

B. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1624 mm).

C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Owner to provide area within existing facilities for Contractor’s field office.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".

C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.

D. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

E. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.



2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

I. Telephone Service: Contractor’s field superintendent to provided with cellular telephone service. Contractor to provide a list of contact numbers for contractors onsite management personnel and off-site project manager.

1. Post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary tool shed located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.



2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Location of waste disposal facilities to coordinated and approved by Owner and Architect. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

F. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.

G. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."



C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

D. Site Enclosure Fence: None Required.

E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

G. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

I. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side with sound attenuation blankets and as indicated.

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule.

2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and

security locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.



1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas, in the interior of the existing buildings and on Owner’s property.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with

concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic

matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry

before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.

2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative

humidity, and exposure to water limits.



a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

2. Repair or replace damaged street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."



SAFETY AND HEALTH 01 59 50 - 1

SECTION 01 59 50

SAFETY AND HEALTH

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. References: In addition to publications referenced in the Construction Contract Clauses, the following publications designate and define hazardous conditions, and establish procedures for handling these conditions.

1. 29 CFR, Part 1910: Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) General Industry and Health Standards.

2. 29 CFR, Part 1926: OSHA Construction Industry Standards. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 (National Electric Code)

B. Acquisition of Publications: Referenced CFR publications may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, U.S. Government Bookstore, Chicago, IL 60605, Milwaukee, WI 53203, Detroit, MI 48226, Cleveland, OH 44199, Columbus, OH 43215, and Washington, D.C. 20402 [1-866-512-1800 or www.access.gpo.gov/su_docs]. The National Electric Code is available from the NFPA, Quincy, MA 02269 [1-800-344-3555 or www.nfpacatalog.org].

1.2 SAFETY MEETING

A. Prior to commencing construction, representatives of the Contractor, including the principal on-site project representative and one or more safety representatives, shall meet with designated representatives of the Owner for the purpose of reviewing the Contract's safety and health requirements.

B. The Contractor's safety and health program and job-specific safety plan shall be reviewed, and implementation of safety and health provisions pertinent to the work shall be discussed. Refer to paragraphs 1.4.A. and 1.4.B in this section for further information.

1.3 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS

A. Contractor Responsibility: Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable codes, standards, and regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel during execution of the work, and shall hold the Owner harmless for any action on his part, or that of his or his subcontractors’ employees, that results in illness, injury, or death.

1. The Contractor shall have written safety and health programs in compliance with 29 CFR Parts 1910 and 1926.



2. The Contractor shall provide for appropriate emergency first aid materials and equipment. In addition, he must provide the following on site: a twenty pound ABC-rated fire extinguisher; biohazard barrier tape and safety cones to isolate bloodspills; and adequate absorbent material to collect any chemical spill that might occur. Finally, a list of emergency phone numbers and points of contact for fire, hospital, police, ambulance, and any other necessary contacts shall be posted at the worksite.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Safety and Health Programs: The Contractor shall submit, for approval, copies of the project safety and health programs, as applicable to the work scope, or required as a result of the safety meeting, including but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Occupational Noise Exposure. 2. Fall Protection. 3. Personnel Protective Equipment. 4. Electrical Safety Related Work Practices. 5. Confined Space. 6. Indoor Air Quality 7. Ventilation of work areas and occupied spaces before, during and after

painting work.

B. Contractor's Safety Plan: In addition to specific safety and health programs applicable to the project, Contractor shall submit firm's general safety plan listing emergency procedures and contact persons with home addresses and telephone numbers.

Accident Reporting: Any accident or occupational illness which will require reporting to the Contractor's insurance carrier(s) and/or to the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) must be reported to the Regional Fire Protection and Safety Team no later than 48 hours following the incident.

C. Safety Plan: The Contractor shall develop and implement a Safety Plan. This plan shall cover all phases of operations including; confined space; trenching/excavating; and electrical work.

1. Number, type, and experience of employees used in the work project. 2. Description of how applicable safety and health regulations and

standards are to be met. 3. Type of protective equipment and work procedure to be used. 4. Emergency procedures for accidental spills or exposures. 5. Identification of possible hazards, problems, and proposed control

mechanisms. 6. Protection of site visitors and others not related to operation. 7. Interfacing and control of any subcontractors. 8. Identification of any required analyses, demonstrations, and validation

requirements.



D. Other Submittals: If agreed to in writing at the safety meeting, other submittals may be required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

A. Special facilities, devices, equipment, and similar items used by the Contractor or subcontractors in execution of the Work shall comply with 29 CFR Part 1910, Subpart I and other applicable regulations.

2.2 UNFORESEEN HAZARDS

A. Should any unforeseen or site-specific, safety-related factor, hazard, or condition become evident during the performance of work at this site, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to bring such to the attention of the Owner, both verbally and in writing, as quickly as possible for resolution. In the interim, the Contractor shall take prudent action to establish and maintain safe working conditions and safeguard employees, the public, and the environment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EMERGENCY SUSPENSION OF WORK

A. When the Contractor is notified by the Owner of non-compliance with the safety or health provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall immediately, unless otherwise instructed, correct the unsafe or unhealthy condition.

1. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly, all or part of the Work will be stopped by notice from the Owner.

2. When, in the opinion of and by notice given by the Owner, satisfactory corrective action has been taken by the Contractor, work shall resume.

3. The Contractor shall not be allowed any extension of time or compensation for damages in connection with a work stoppage for an unsafe or unhealthy condition.

3.2 PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL

A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, occupants, or damage to property of others. The public and occupants includes all persons not employed by the Contractor or a subcontractor.

B. Where practical, the work area shall be fenced, barricaded, or otherwise blocked off from the public or occupants to prevent unauthorized entry into the work area.

1. Provide traffic barricades and traffic control signage where construction activities occur in vehicular areas.



2. Doors and exits shall not be obstructed or used in a manner to encroach upon routes of ingress or egress utilized by the public or occupants, or to present an unsafe or unhealthy condition to the public or occupants.

3. Store, position, and use equipment, tools, materials, scraps, and trash in a manner that does not present a hazard to the public or occupants by accidental shifting, ignition, or other hazardous activity.

4. Store and transport refuse and debris in a manner to prevent unsafe and unhealthy conditions for the public and occupants. Cover refuse containers, and remove refuse on a frequent regular basis acceptable to the Owner. Use tarpaulins or other means to prevent loose transported materials from dropping from trucks.

3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Comply with applicable federal, state and local noise control laws, ordinances and regulations, including but not limited to 29 CFR 1910.95 and 29 CFR 1926.52.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 01 23 00 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 4. Section 01 42 00 "References" for applicable industry standards for products

specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the



significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 14 calender days of receipt of request, or seven business days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.



2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a

weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials

and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles,



dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1

SECTION 01 73 00

EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

4. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.




A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that

cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Electrical wiring systems. j. Operating systems of special construction.



3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work,



investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions



outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to

obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work

progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, and ramps.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Contractor will identify existing benchmarks and control points.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.



C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of one permanent benchmark on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied

spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately



located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.



1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 1.



3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum

the entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.


EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 10

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



FIRE PREVENTION PRECAUTIONS FOR HOT WORK 01 73 50 - 1

SECTION 01 73 50

FIRE PREVENTION PRECAUTIONS FOR HOT WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section applies to safeguards to be observed in performing hot work, including welding, soldering, brazing and other operations where open flames or implements utilizing heat are used.

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. The Contractor shall ensure that operations involving the use of open-flame, electrical arc equipment or flammable substances are not conducted until notifying the Owner or Owner’s authorized representative.

B. The Owner must approve the location of asphalt kettles for roofing work.

1.3 NOTIFICATON

A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner or Owner’s authorized representative of all locations where hot work has been performed not less than 30 minutes or more than 90 minutes after work is completed or stopped for the day.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Before starting operations, the Contractor shall furnish trained personnel to provide fire watches for locations where hot work is to be performed. One firewatcher may observe several locations in a relatively small contiguous area if approved by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. Contractor shall furnish suitable type, fully-charged, operable portable fire extinguisher to each fire watcher.

1. The Contractor shall provide firewatchers who know how to operate the fire extinguisher, how to turn on a fire alarm and how to summon the fire department.


FIRE PREVENTION PRECAUTIONS FOR HOT WORK 01 73 50 - 2

B. Before starting operations, take suitable precautions to minimize the hazard of a fire communicating to the opposite side of walls, floors, ceilings and roofs from the operations.

3.2 SAFETY MEASURES

A. Hot work shall not be done in or near areas where flammable liquids are present or thought to be present. Insofar as possible, the Contractor shall remove and keep the area free from all combustibles, including rubbish, paper and waste within a radius of 25 feet (7.62 m) from hot operations.

1. If combustible material cannot be removed, the Contractor shall furnish fireproof blankets to cover such materials. At the direction of the Owner or Owner’s authorized representative, floors, walls, and ceilings of combustible material shall be wetted thoroughly with water before, during, and after operations sufficiently to afford adequate protection.

2. Where possible, the Contractor shall furnish and use baffles of metal or gypsum board to prevent the spraying of sparks, hot slag and other hot particles into surrounding combustible material.

B. The Contractor shall prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors, and holes and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings and roofs. Cylinders of gas used in hot work shall be placed a safe distance from the work. The Contractor shall provide hoses and equipment free of deterioration, malfunction and leaks. Suitable supports shall be provided to prevent accidental overturning of cylinders. All cylinder control valves shall be shut off while in use with the gas pressure regulator set at 15 psi (103 kPa) or less.

C. When hot work operations are completed or ended for the day, each location of the day’s work shall be inspected by the Contractor 30 to 60 minutes after completion of operations to detect for hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper housekeeping is maintained. Contractor shall clean up the area of work at the end of each shift or workday.

D. Suitable type, fully charged, operable portable fire extinguisher shall be available at all times during hot work operations.

E. If any of the above safeguards are not employed, or are violated, the Owner may, by written notice, stop the work until compliance is obtained. Such stoppage shall not relieve the Contractor form performing his work within the Contract period for the Contract price.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.


1. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

2. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.


CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 2


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. easure throughout waste management plan.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements. 4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,

record Specifications, and record Product Data. 5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing

Owner's personnel.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of [10] <Insert number> days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by [Architect] [Construction Manager]. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain [Architect's] [Construction Manager's] signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Section 018113.13 "Sustainable

Design Requirements - LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations," Section 018113.16 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Commercial Interiors," Section 018113.19 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Core and Shell Development," and Section 018113.23 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Schools" and in individual Sections.

7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.



C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of [10] <Insert number> days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise

Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial

Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of

products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local

emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.



B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. c. Three paper copies. Architect will return two copies.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 10 business days days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.



1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:



a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free

condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment,

and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."



3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.



B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect, will return two copies.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 5 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 10 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.



E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that

designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.



1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:



1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:



1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.



D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including

disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.



6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to



identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy of each submittal.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.



B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings.

2. Format: DWG, Version 2004, Microsoft Windows operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record

prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 6. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract

Drawings for use in recording information.

a. See Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate

electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.



2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1

SECTION 01 79 00

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For facilitator and instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.



1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use in PDF electronic file format on compact disc.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational

materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design

responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.



3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.



b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and

reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom



instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.

1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade graphic label.

2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.

3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications.

4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. E-mail address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.

b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table of contents.

c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.



SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1

SECTION 024119

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.



1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of

materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control, and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and

of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

C. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.



1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or

damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties may include the following: 1. Fiberglass Roof Shingles 2. Cementitious Roof Deck

B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.



D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,

provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."



B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable

materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to

avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as

not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.



9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal.”

B. Reuse of Building Elements: Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for

new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.

F. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Section 07 31 12 “Asphalt Shingles", Section 07 52 00 “Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing” for new roofing requirements.

1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories.



2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device

that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 1

SECTION 031000

CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This Section supplements the Drawings and specifies project technical requirements,

and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, and identifies governing codes and standards for formwork, and the design, installation and removal of shoring and reshoring for cast-in-place concrete structural components of this Project.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcement Section 032520: Anchors and Inserts Section 033000: Concrete - General Section 033100: Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 053100: Steel Deck 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the following codes,

specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. American Concrete Institute ACI 347R-94 - "Guide to Formwork for Concrete." 2. U.S. Department of Commerce: U.S. Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-83

"Construction and Industrial Plywood." B. Design, construct, erect, maintain and remove forms and related structures for cast-in-

place concrete work in compliance with ACI 347.



1.5 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to provide completed cast-in-place concrete surfaces complying

with the tolerances specified in ACI 347 and as follows: 1. Variation from plumb in lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and arrises:

1/4 inch [5 mm] per 10 feet [3 m], but not more than 1 inch [25 mm]. For exposed corner columns, control joint grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1/4 inch [5 mm] in any bay or 20 feet [6 m] maximum; 1/2 inch [10 mm] maximum in 40 feet [12 m] or more.

2. Variation from level or grade in beam soffits and in arrises: 1/4 inch [5 mm] in 10 feet [3 m], 3/8 inch [10 mm] in any bay or 20 feet [6 m] maximum, and 3/4 inch [20 mm] in 40 feet [12 m] or more. For exposed sills, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1/4 inch [5 mm] in any bay or 20 feet [6 m] maximum and 1/2 inch [10 mm] in 40 feet [12 m] or more.

3. Variation from position of the linear building lines and related columns: 1/2 inch [10 mm] in any bay or 20 feet [6 m] maximum, and 1 inch [25 mm] in 40 feet [12

m] or more. 4. Variation in sizes and locations of sleeves, floor openings and wall openings:

1/4 inch [5 mm]. 5. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns, piers and beams, thickness

of slabs and walls: minus 1/4 inch [5 mm] and plus 1/2 inch [10 mm]. 6. Variation in footing plan dimensions: minus 1/2 inch [10 mm] and plus 2 inches

[50 mm]; misplacement or eccentricity: 2% of the footings width in direction of misplacement but not more than 2 inches [50 mm]; thickness reduction: minus 5%.

7. Variation in steps in a flight of stairs and tread-and-riser type seating slabs: 1/8 inch [3 mm] for rise and 1/4 inch [5 mm] for treads; in consecutive steps: 1/16 inch [2 mm] for rise and 1/8 inch [3 mm] for treads.

1.6 INSPECTION A. Before concrete placement: check the lines and levels of erected formwork. Make

corrections and adjustments to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems.

B. During concrete placement: check formwork and related supports to ensure that forms

are not displaced and that completed work will be within specified tolerances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS



A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed, plywood-faced or other type panel materials to provide continuous, straight, as-cast surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of placed concrete without bow or deflection beyond allowable tolerances.

B. Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1, "B-B High Density

Overlaid Concrete Form", Class 1, or "B-B Plyform", Class 1, at architecturally exposed surfaces.

C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be

unexposed in the finish structure with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least 2 edges and 1 side for tight fit.

D. Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Form round-section members with paper or fiber

tubes, constructed of laminated plies using water resistant type adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Round-section members may also be formed using steel forms, provided the seams on adjacent members are oriented in the same direction.

1. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation.

2. Paper or fiber units are to have a "seamless" interior surface to eliminate spiral gaps and seams.

E. Metal Forms: 1. Corrugated from tough-temper low carbon reduced steel with a minimum yield

strength of 80,000 psi [5600 kg/cm2, 550 MPa] by 0.1% offset method to a gage

and nominal corrugation depth as shown on the Drawings. 2. Manufacture metal forms from uncoated sheets conforming to Federal Spec

QQ-S-00640, full hard. 3. Place metal forms with corrugation edges up and with corrugations

perpendicular to supports. Lap sides one corrugation. Lap ends 4 inches [10

cm] and place end laps over supports. Where support is steel plate or steel beam, attach metal forms by plug welding through curved washers, or side clips.

F. Earth Forms: 1. Earth forms for footings are acceptable provided the excavation is 2 inches

larger on each earth-formed face than planned and the earth sides will form near vertical surfaces.

2.2 FORM TIES A. Provide factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off form ties,



designed to prevent deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide form ties which will leave a hole not larger than 1

inches diameter in the concrete surfaces. Provide ties so that portion remaining within concrete after removal of exterior parts is distant from the outer concrete surface by 2 inches [5 cm].

2.3 FORM COATINGS A. Provide V.O.C. compliant commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will

not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds.

1. V.O.C. content shall be a maximum 2.8 lbs/gal. [340 gm/liter], unless more stringent codes or laws apply.

2.4 INSERTS A. Provide metal inserts and other embedded items as required for anchorage of

materials or equipment to concrete construction, not supplied by other trades and as required for the work.

2.5 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork so that it will safely support

vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Carry vertical and lateral loads to the ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained adequate strength for that purpose.

B. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight

of moving equipment operated on formwork, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability and other factors pertinent to the safety of the structure during construction.

C. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-

place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. D. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete

placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which concrete

formwork is to be performed and notify the Construction Manager in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Construct forms complying with ACI 347, to the sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions

shown and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structure. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, and inserts and other features required. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes.

B. Provide temporary openings in wall forms, column forms and at other locations

necessary to permit inspection and clean-out. C. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for

cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement and for placement of concrete. Brace temporary closures and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms in as inconspicuous location as possible, consistent with project requirements.

D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete

surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where the slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses and the like, to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal.

E. Form intersecting planes to provide true, clean-cut corners, with edge of plywood not

exposed as form for concrete. F. Erect falsework and support, brace and maintain it to safely support vertical, lateral

and asymmetrical loads applied. G. Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of taking up

formwork settlement and deflection during concrete placing operations, using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof. Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured.

H. Support form facing materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to



prevent deflection. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregularities and within allowable tolerances.

I. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and

pressures of fresh concrete and construction loads for long span members without intermediate supports.

J. Carefully inspect falsework and formwork during and after concrete placement

operations to identify abnormal deflections or signs of failure; make necessary adjustments to produce work of required dimensions.

K. Correct conditions which could cause an unsatisfactory finished product. If conditions

are severe enough to endanger the safety of personnel in the area, stop the concrete placement until the unsafe condition has been corrected.

3.3 FORMS FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE A. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie

holes. Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared holes. B. Do not use metal cover plates for patching holes on defects in forms. C. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets.

Back joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true square intersections. D. Use extra studs, whalers and bracing to prevent bowing of forms between studs and

to avoid bowed appearance in concrete. Do not use narrow strips to form materials which will produce bow.

E. Assemble forms so they may be readily removed without damage to exposed

concrete surfaces. F. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth-finish materials and

install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. G. Form exposed corners of beams, columns, piers and walls to produce square,

smooth, solid unbroken lines, except as otherwise indicated. H. Form chamfers with 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch [2 cm x 2 cm] strips, accurately formed and

surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edge joints. Extend terminal edges to required limit and miter chamfer at changes in direction.

I. See 03300-Series sections for treatment of control and construction joints, including

wood screeds, metal keyways and sawcuts. Locate as indicated or specified.



3.4 PROVISIONS FOR OTHER TRADES A. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades,

including those under separate prime contracts (if any). Size and location of openings, recesses and chases are the responsibility of the trade requiring such items. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into forms.

3.5 CLEANING AND TIGHTENING A. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,

wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is to be placed. Re-tighten forms immediately after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks.

3.6 FORM COATINGS A. Coat form contact surfaces with form-coating compound before reinforcement is

placed. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with reinforcement or surfaces which will be bonded to fresh concrete. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect

against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.7 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for

other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto.

3.8 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED STRIPS FOR SLABS A. Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain

required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units to support types of screeds required.

3.9 DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF SHORES AND RESHORES A. Design, installation and performance of shoring and reshoring is the responsibility of

the Contractor. B. Design shoring and reshoring to safely support the intended weight of supported



concrete and all superimposed construction loads without imparting shoring or reshoring-settlement-induced deflections in the supported and supporting structures.

C. Use actual calculated superimposed construction loads in the design of shoring and

reshoring, but not less than 20 psf [100 kg/m2, 1 kPa].

D. Submit shoring drawings to the Architect for review. Indicate loads calculated by the

designer of the shores and reshores. Indicate individual members, connections and the extent of reshoring to floor below. Indicate the sequence and timing of shore and reshore removal, and designate the individual having responsibility for its production under the authority of the Contractor. The shoring drawings are to be sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer.

E. Architect's and Engineer's review of shoring drawings is only for compliance with the

requirement of its production, and does not represent approval in any way. F. Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring and as herein specified. G. Install shores and reshores which are easily adjustable. H. Provide adequate bracing to shores and reshores and install same in a way which

precludes their displacement. I. Design sand plates to a size sufficient to safely support the shoring and reshoring

load without settlement which would impart permanent deflections in the structural elements of the Project.

J. Place sand plates on firm soil free from the possibility of washout or soil slope failure. K. Remove shores and reshores in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially

cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to safely support the work without excessive stress or deflection.

3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting concrete, such as sides of beams, columns, piers and walls,

may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete; provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations and provided that curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, slabs and other

structural elements may be removed after cumulatively curing for 72 hours, but only if shores are arranged to permit removal of form material without loosening, displacing or otherwise disturbing shores and reshores.



C. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of the concrete location or members.

D. Shores may be removed as determined by the shoring and reshoring design and

established sequence, produced under the authority of the Contractor. 3.11 RE-USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in the work. Split, frayed,

delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact surfaces as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placements, thoroughly clean

surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to the Architect.



CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 1

SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This Section supplements the Drawings and specifies project technical requirements,

and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, and identifies governing codes and standards for fabrication, placement, supports, inspection and final acceptance of reinforcing for the cast-in-place concrete structural components of this Project.


Conditions, and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Division 1: General Requirements Section 031000: Concrete Formwork Section 032520: Anchors and Inserts Section 033000: Concrete - General Section 033100: Cast-in-place Concrete 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the latest edition of the following

codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. American Welding Society, (AWS) D1.4 "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing

Steel." 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, (CRSI): a. "Manual of Standard Practice" b. "Placing Reinforcing Bars" 3. American Concrete Institute a. ACI 318-99 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." b. SP-66 "ACI Detailing Manual - 1994." c. ACI 315-99 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement"



1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements, for additional information. B. Mill Certificates: Submit steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile and bend

tests for reinforcing steel. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of concrete

reinforcement. Comply with the SP-66. Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements and assemblies, type and quantity of bar supports, as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to the project site bundled, tagged and marked. Use durable,

permanently marked tags indicating bar size, lengths and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams.

B. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation

of dirt or excessive rust. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Including Supplement S1, Grade 60 for all sizes. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. Use flat sheets only. C. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing,

supporting and fastening reinforcement in place. 1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless

otherwise indicated. Do not use wood, brick and other unacceptable materials, except as permitted herein.

2. For footings and mats whose minimum thickness is 10 inches [25 cm], use precast concrete brick supports of adequate thickness for the clearances specified. Concrete masonry bricks are not acceptable.

3. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with plastic-tipped legs.

4. For concrete surfaces exposed to water, water spray and/or rain in the finished building, and for surfaces which will be sandblasted, use supports with stainless steel legs. Welded stainless steel leg tips are unacceptable.

5. Over waterproof membranes, use concrete brick supports to prevent penetration of the membrane.



2.2 WELDING OF REINFORCING BARS

A. Welding of reinforcing bars is unacceptable. B. Metal filled sleeves or mechanical butt splices in which filler metal interlocks the grooves

inside the splice sleeve with the reinforcing bar deformations may be used with the approval of the Engineer. Assure that types of sleeve splices which conform to the specific requirements for tension (125% yield strength) and full ultimate tensile strength of the reinforcing bars.

2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform with required shapes and dimensions, with

fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" and with ACI 315. In case of fabricating errors, do not re-bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material.

B. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be

permitted in the work: 1. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding CRSI fabrication tolerances. 2. Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or final shop drawings. 3. Bars with cross-section reduced by excessive rusting or other causes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with the specified codes and standards and Concrete Reinforcing Steel

Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified.

B. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, and other materials which

reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by

formwork, construction or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing steel by use of metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, or hangers, as required. In cases such as in trench footings, mat foundations, and thick slabs, support top layer of reinforcing with rebar bent in a type 25 standard bending pattern.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange,

space and securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16 gage [1.5 mm] black-annealed wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire so that wire ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces with a clearance equal to that of the main reinforcing steel.



E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least

one full mesh, or 8 inches [20 cm] minimum, and lace splices with 16 gage wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps.

3.2 SUPPORTING REINFORCING STEEL A. Install sufficient numbers of supports and of strengths to carry reinforcement. Do not

place reinforcing bars more than 6" [15 cm] beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.

3.3 SPLICES A. Install standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact and tying

tightly with wire. Comply with requirements of ACI 315 and ACI 318 for minimum lap of spliced bars, except where longer laps are shown on the Drawings.



ANCHORS AND INSERTS 03 25 20 - 1

SECTION 03 25 20

ANCHORS AND INSERTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This Section supplements the Drawings and specifies project technical requirements,

and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, and identifies governing codes and standards for fabrication, placement and final acceptance of anchors and inserts in concrete and masonry components of this Project.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Division 1: General Requirements Section 031000: Concrete Formwork Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcement Section 033000: Concrete - General Section 033100: Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 051000: Structural Steel 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements, for additional information. B. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOVETAIL ANCHOR SLOTS A. 1-inch [25 mm] wide back x 1-inch [25 mm] deep with 5/8-inch [16 mm] throat. Holes 4

inches on center, made of 22-gauge [0,75 mm] galvanized steel. Anchor slots shall be as manufactured by:

Durowall Inc. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Heckman Building Products, Inc.



2.2 WEDGE INSERTS A. Heavy duty malleable iron inserts designed to securely hold in proper adjustment

position the shelf angles, for the loads indicated in the Drawings. B. Inserts to be complete with 3/4-inch [2 cm] diameter galvanized wedge-shaped bolt, flat

washer and hex nut. C. Manufactured by: Heckman Building Products, Inc. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.3 WELDED ANCHORS A. Headed Stud Anchors for Plates Anchored into Concrete: Manufactured by: Nelson Stud Welding Company (A United-Carr Division of TRW, Inc.) KSM Welding Systems Division (Omark Industries) B. Deformed Stud Anchors: Manufactured by: KSM Welding Systems Division (Omark Industries) Nelson Stud Welding Company (A United-Carr Division of TRW, Inc.) C. Welded Threaded Studs: Manufactured by: Nelson Stud Welding Company (A United-Carr Division of TRW, Inc.) KSM Welding Systems Division (Omark Industries) 2.4 EXPANSION BOLTS A. Acceptable products: "Kwik-Bolts" by Hilti Fastening Systems "Red Head" by ITW Ramset/Readhead wedge type stud bolt anchors by Star Expansion Company B. Furnish size, length, type, as called for in the Contract Documents or as required to

complete the work. 2.5 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM A. Acceptable products: "HIT HY 150" by Hilti Fastening Systems "HIT-A SHORT HY 20" by Hilti Fastening Systems



B. Furnish size, length, type, as called for in the Contract Documents or as required to

complete the work. 2.6 REGLETS A. Reglets to be complete, with either a removable waterproof insert or cloth tape covering,

to prevent grout getting into the reglet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOVETAIL ANCHOR SLOTS A. At concrete beams and walls: Set slots vertically at a spacing of 24 inches [60 cm]. B. At concrete column: Set single slots at centerline of wall abutting column. 3.2 WEDGE INSERTS A. Verify height, location with the corresponding trade. Place 1/2-inch (#4) [12 mm]

reinforcing bar, 6 inches [15 cm] long, through anchor loop to increase anchorage capacity.

3.3 WELDED ANCHORS A. Install in accordance with Supplier's instructions. 3.4 EXPANSION BOLTS A. Install in accordance with Supplier's instructions. 3.5 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM A. Install in accordance with Supplier's instructions. 3.6 REGLETS A. Refer to Drawings for reglet locations at vertical surfaces. B. Verify height, location and extent with Roofer and General Contractor.



CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00

CONCRETE


and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, and identifies governing codes and standards for concrete and concrete materials, ingredients, admixtures and their delivery to the Project.


Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Division 1: General Requirements Section 031000: Concrete Formwork Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcement Section 033100: Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications

and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 211.1-91 "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,

Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete." 2. ACI 214-77 "Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of

Concrete. (Re-approved 1989) 3. ACI 301-99 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 4. ACI 304R-89 "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete." 5. ACI 305R-91 "Hot Weather Concreting." 6. ACI 306R-88 "Cold Weather Concreting." 7. ACI 309R-96 "Guide for Consolidation of Concrete." 8. ACI 311.4R-95 "Guide for Concrete Inspection." 9. ACI 318-99 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 10. Ohio Building Code, 2009 Edition. 1.5 CONCRETE DEFINITIONS


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 2

Interior concrete: concrete used in members, which will remain dry and will be

protected from moisture in service. Exterior concrete: concrete used in members, which are not protected by

building enclosures and which will not be protected from moisture in service.

Exposed concrete: concrete used in members, exterior or interior, that will be exposed to moisture but will not be exposed to chlorides in service.

1.6 WORKMANSHIP A. The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to

the specified requirements, including strength, slump, workability, setting time. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect.

1.7 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TESTING AND MIX DESIGN A. Pre-Construction Material Testing Service: Employ, at Contractor's expense, a testing

laboratory acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes and to conduct tests on laboratory trial batches for all classes of concrete. These tests are not part of on-site quality control testing, which is specified as part of Paragraph 3.4 Field Quality Control.

B. Testing agency shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329. C. Materials may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect, at any time

during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at Owner's expense, including the retesting of rejected materials including installed work, shall be done at Contractor's expense.

D. Tests for Concrete Materials: 1. Test aggregates by method of sampling and testing of ASTM C 33. 2. For portland cement, sample the cement and determine the properties by the

methods of test ASTM C 150. 3. Submit written reports to the Architect, for each sample tested, prior to the start of

work. Provide the project identification name and number, date of report, name of Contractor, name of concrete testing service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer and brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the referenced specification for each material, and test results. Indicate whether or not material is acceptable for intended use.

4. Certificates of material properties and compliance with specified requirements may be submitted in lieu of testing, when acceptable to the Architect. Certificates of compliance must be signed by the materials producer and the Contractor.

1.8 SUBMITTALS


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 3

A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements, for additional information. B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and specifications with

application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, curing compounds, patching compounds, and others as requested by the Architect.

C. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit two copies of laboratory test reports for pre-

construction testing of concrete materials and mix design, as specified. D. Material Certificates: Provide materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test

reports only when permitted by the Architect. Material certificates shall be signed by the manufacturer and the Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, the specified requirements.

E. Submit Contractor's proposed method of concrete placement for each classification of

concrete when submitting mix designs. When a pump mix is submitted, indicate the design slump of the as-delivered concrete and the anticipated slump at the point of placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Use only one brand of cement throughout the

project unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: 1. ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for

all exposed concrete. 2. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as iron

sulfides, pyrite, marcasite or ochre, which can cause stains on exposed concrete surfaces.

3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but which have shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength or service and durability may be used when acceptable to the Architect.

C. Fine Aggregate: 1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps, or other deleterious

substances. 2. Dune sand, bank-run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. D. Coarse Aggregates:


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 4

1. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, as follows:

a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bankrun gravel is

not permitted. 2. Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension

between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundle of bars.

3. These limitations may be waived if in the judgement of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honey comb or voids.

E. Supply of Aggregates: Use aggregates from one source of supply to ensure uniformity in

color, size and shape. F. Pozzolans: Flyash, Class F, per ASTM C 618, allowed on a one-to-one replacement for

up to 15% of portland cement content. Flyash in amounts greater than 20% of the weight of portland cement content is not permitted.

G. Water: Clean, fresh, potable. 2.2 CALCIUM CHLORIDE A. Maximum water soluble chloride ion concentrations as a percent by weight of cement,

contributed from the ingredients, including cementitious materials, aggregates, water, and admixtures shall not exceed the limits below, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 260:

1. 0.10% maximum: unless noted. 2. 0.06% maximum: for prestressed concrete members. 2.3 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: Conform to ASTM C 260. Air-Mix by Euclid Chemical Co. Daravair or Darex II AEA by W. R. Grace Co. MB-VR or Micro Air by BASF AER by Sika Chemical Corp. B. Water-Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C 494, Type A. Eucon WR-75 by Euclid Chemical Co. WRDA Series by W.R. Grace Co. Daracem - 55 or 65 by W.R. Grace Co. Polyheed 997 by BASF Plastocrete 161 by Sika Chemical Corp.


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 5

C. High Range Water-Reducing Admixture (superplasticizer): Conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or G: Eucon Super 37 by Euclid Chemical Corp. ADVA Flow by W. R. Grace and Company Pozzolith 400N by BASF Rheobuild 1000 by BASF Sikament by Sika Chemical Corp. D. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: Conform to ASTM C 494, Type D. Eucon Retarder 75 by Euclid Chemical Co. Daratard Series by W. R. Grace Co. Pozzolith 100-XR by BASF Plastiment by Sika Chemical Co E. Non-Chloride Accelerator: Conform to ASTM C 494, Type C or E. Accelguard 80 by Euclid Chemical Co. PolarSet by W.R. Grace Co. Trimix - NCA by Sonneborn F. Calcium Chloride: Refer to Paragraph 2.2 for maximum water soluble chloride ion

concentrations in concrete, contributed from the ingredients, including admixtures, cementitious materials, aggregates, and water.

G. Certification: Provide the manufacturer's product data sheets for the proposed

admixtures and a letter written by a technical representative of the admixture manufacturer. The letter is to state that the proposed admixtures have been selected specifically for this project based on this specifications, on the intended use of the concrete, and on the chemical compositions of the local materials. In the event any proposed admixture is not specified above, the letter is to provide a brief explanation why the proposed admixture should be considered in lieu of the specified product. Written conformance to above mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content is required and must be submitted by the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Bonding and Patching Agents. 1. Structural Bonding Compound: Epoxy adhesive, 100% solids, two component

material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Euco Epoxy #452 by Euclid Chemical Co. Sikadur Hi-Mod by Sika Chemical Corp. Sikadur Armatec 110 by Sika Chemical Corp. 2. Patching Compound: Contractor is to retain the services of a technical field

representative from one of the manufacturers listed below, to recommend the most appropriate epoxy based or polymer modified patching compound, based on the


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 6

specific repair. The recommended material including a brief description of why it is most appropriate, is to be submitted to the Architect for approval.

Euclid Chemical Co. BASF, Inc. Sika Chemical Corp. 3. Polyvinyl acetate, re-wettable type bonding agents are not acceptable. B. Floor Hardener: 1. Refer to Section 033100 of this Specification. 2.5 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Furnish one of the following pre-mixed non-shrink non-metallic grouts for all construction

where grout is exposed to weather, water or exposed to view in the finished product: Euco N-S by The Euclid Chemical Co. Gilco Const. Grout by W.R. Grace & Co. Set-Grout by BASF Sonogrout by Sonneborn Building Products Div. B. Furnish one of the following pre-mixed non-shrink metallic grouts for all construction

where the grout is not exposed to water, weather or view in the finished product: Supreme Plus by W.R. Grace & Co. Embeco 885 by BASF Ferrolith G by Sonneborn Building Products Div. 2.6 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with

applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.

B. All concrete shall contain the specified water-reducing admixture or the specified high-

range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer). All concrete except interior concrete shall contain the specified air-entraining admixture.

C. Proportion mixes by either trial batch method or field experience method, using materials

to be employed on the Project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1 for normal weight concrete, and report to the Architect the following:

1. Complete identification of aggregate supply source. 2. Scale weight of each aggregate.


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 7

3. Brand, plant location, type and composition of cement. 4. Brand, type and amount of each admixture, 5. Amount of water used in trial mixes. 6. Proportion of each material per cu.yd. of concrete. 7. Gross weight and yield per cu.yd. of trial mixes. 8. Measured slump. 9. Measured air content. 10. Contractor's proposed method of placement. 11. Compressive strengths developed at 7 days and 28 days, from not less than 6 test

cylinders cast for each 7 and 28 day test, and for each design mix. D. Laboratory Trial Batches: 1. Prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength

tests in accordance with ASTM C 39, as specified in ACI 301. 2. Establish a curve showing relationship between water-cement ratio for cement

content and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or at an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve.

E. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at

least 15 days prior to the start of work. F. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been approved by the Architect. G. Adjustment to Concrete mixes: Contractor may request design mix adjustments when

characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Submit laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results for the Architect's acceptance before use.

H. Admixtures: 1. Use air-entraining admixture in all exterior and exposed concrete. a. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result

in concrete at the point of placement having air content of 5?% ("1%) for 1?-inch [4 cm] aggregates and 6% ("1%) for 3/4" and 1 inch [1,9 and 2,5 cm] aggregates, as determined in accordance with ASTM C 231. Provide 4% to 6% air content for all other concrete.

2. Use admixtures for water-reducing and set-control in strict compliance with the

manufacturer's directions. 3. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic

conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control.


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 8

2.7 CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28-day Maximum W/C (*) Use Strength Aggregate Ratio Slump (**) Size ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Footings unless noted 3,000 psi #467 0.45 2" - 4" Exterior Footings 4,000 psi #467 0.40 2" - 4" Paving Slabs and Curbs 4,000 psi # 57 0.40 3" - 5" Walks 4,000 psi # 57 0.40 3" - 5" Exterior Walls 4,000 psi # 57 0.40 3" - 5" Earth Retaining Walls 4,000 psi # 57 0.40 3" - 5" nterior Slabs on Grade 4,000 psi # 57 0.55 3" - 5" Concrete Floor Topping See 03320 of this Specification. Formed Interior Concrete exposed to view 4,000 psi # 57 0.50 3" - 5" Lean Concrete Fill at 21 days 1,500 psi N.A. N.A. N.A. Other Concrete Members 4,000 psi # 57 0.44 3" - 5" ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (*) water-cementitious ratio (**) except as modified by High Range Water Reducing Admixture Conversions: #467 aggregate 4,0 cm nominal maximum size # 57 aggregate 2,5 cm nominal maximum size 2.8 WATER-CEMENTITIOUS RATIO A. Deliver all concrete with the specified water-cementitious ratio. Submit copies of batch

tickets to Architect when requested. B. Calculate ratios by weight. C. Include in the weight of water the following: 1. weight of batch water 2. weight of moisture on surfaces of coarse and fine aggregate 3. weight of water introduced by all admixtures 4. weight of water to be added at point of delivery D. Include in the weight of cementitious materials the following: 1. cement 2. pozzolans, up to 15% of weight of total cementitious materials


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 9

2.9 SLUMP A. Deliver all concrete containing the high-range water-reducing admixture

(superplasticizer) with a slump between 2 and 3 inches [5 to 8 cm] upon arrival at the jobsite, and a maximum slump of 9 inches [25 cm] at the concrete delivery truck discharge point, unless otherwise directed by the Architect, or otherwise indicated in the approved mix design.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE MIXING AND DELIVERY A. Concrete may be mixed at batch plants or it may be transit-mixed as herein specified.

Batch plants must comply with the requirements of ACI 304, with sufficient capacity to produce concrete in the quantities required to meet the construction schedule. All plant facilities are subject to testing laboratory inspection and acceptance of the Architect.

B. Comply with the requirements of ASTM C 94, and as herein specified, provided the

quantity and rate of delivery will permit unrestricted progress of the work in accordance with the concrete placement schedule. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required, as specified below. Proposed changes in mixing procedures, other than those herein specified, must be accepted by the Architect before implementation.

C. Plant equipment and facilities: Conform to National Ready-Mix Concrete Association

"Checklist for Certification of Ready-Mix Concrete Production Facilities". D. Modification to ASTM C 94 are as follows: 1. Quality of Concrete: Use concrete materials, proportions, and properties as herein

specified, in lieu of Section 4. 2. Tolerances in Slump: Use slump within the ranges as herein specified, in lieu of

Section 6.1. Comply with other criteria of Section 6. 3. Mixing and Delivery: Delete the reference for allowing additional water to be

added to the batch for material with sufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted as specified in Section 11.7, but may be permitted only upon the Architect's approval. In addition to the requirements of Section 11.7, when the air temperature is between 85E F. [30E C] and 90E F. [33E C], reduce the mixing and delivery time from 90 minutes to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90E F. [33E C], reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. When a truck mixer is used for the complete mixing of concrete, begin the mixing operation within 30 minutes after the cement has been intermixed with the aggregates.

E. Submit duplicate delivery tickets with each load of concrete delivered to the site, one for

the Architect and one for the Contractor. In addition to the requirements of ASTM C 94 Section 16.1, provide the following information on delivery tickets:

1. Type and brand of cement. 2. Cement content per cu.yd. of concrete.


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 10

3. Maximum size of aggregate. 4. Total water in gallons and expressed as water/cement ratio. 3.2 STRENGTH A. Delete ASTM C 94 Section 17; comply with concrete testing requirements as herein

specified. 3.3 DELIVERY EQUIPMENT A. Maintain equipment in proper operating condition, with drums cleaned before charging

each batch. Schedule rates of delivery in order to prevent delay of placing the concrete after mixing, or holding dry-mixed materials too long in the mixer before the addition of water and admixtures.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner will employ a separate testing laboratory to perform field quality control

testing and to submit test reports. B. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Sampling and testing for quality control

during the placement of concrete include the following, as directed by the Architect: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply

with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and

one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Air content: ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one test for every

other concrete load at the point of discharge, or when the indication of change requires.

4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40E F. [4E C] and below, and when 80E F. [25E C] and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens are made.

5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of five standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required.

6. Compressive Strength Tests: a. ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. [70 m3] or fraction thereof, of

each concrete class placed in any one day for each 5,000 sq. ft. [450 m2] of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, 3 specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

b. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.


CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 11

c. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his/her judgement, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

d. When the strength of field cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

e. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made.

f. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 day and 28 day tests.

C. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when

test results indicate the specified concrete and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.

3.5 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTS A. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump or total air

content outside the specified values. B. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory

if the averages of all sets of three consecutive compressive strength test results equal or exceed the 28-day design compressive strength of the type of class of concrete, and if no individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi [35 kg/cm2, 3,5 MPa].

C. Strength test of specimens cured under field conditions may be required by Architect to

check the adequacy of curing and protection of already placed concrete. Specimens shall be molded by the field quality control laboratory at the same time and from the same samples as the laboratory-cured specimens.

D. Improve means and procedures for curing and protecting concrete when the 28-day

compressive strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-cured specimens.

E. If individual test of laboratory-cured specimens produce strengths more than 500 psi [35

kg/cm2, 3,5 MPa] below the required minimum compressive strength, or if tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, use additional measures to assure that the load-bearing capacity of the structure is not less than that intended by design.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 00 - 1

SECTION 03 31 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, and identifies governing codes and standards for placement, consolidation, finishing, curing, testing and final acceptance of cast-in-place concrete for the structural components of this Project.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Division 1: General Requirements Section 031000: Concrete Formwork Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcement Section 032520: Anchors and Inserts Section 033000: Concrete - General 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the latest edition of the following


1. ACI 301-99 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 304R-89 "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete." 3. ACI 305R-91 "Hot Weather Concreting." 4. ACI 306R-88 "Cold Weather Concreting." 5. ACI 309R-96 "Guide for Consolidation of Concrete." 6. ACI 311.4R-95 "Guide for Concrete Inspection." 7. ACI 318-99 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 8. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) / ACI "1999 Concrete Repair Manual." 9. Ohio Building Code, 2009 Edition. 10. CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars" 11. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)



B. Concrete Testing Service: Refer to Section 033000, Concrete-General. C. Field Reference Manual: Have available at the project field office a copy of ACI SP-

15(95) "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 301 with Selected ACI and ASTM References" and a copy of ICRI/ACI "1999 Concrete Repair Manual".

1.5 DEFINITIONS See Paragraph 1.5, Section 03300, for definition of various concrete exposures. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate the work of this Section with requirements for submittals specified in Division

1 and Section 033000. B. Operations Manual: Sufficiently in advance of concrete placement to allow through

review, submit to the Architect and Engineer the following information, bound in the form of a manual:

1. Design mixes and test results for each classification of concrete, including brand

names of cement and admixtures, and source and type of aggregates. Refer to Section 03300, Concrete, General.

2. Description of proposed waterstops, with name of manufacturer, including specifications and instructions for surface preparation, installation and splicing.

3. Description of reinforcing bar support, with name of manufacturer. 4. Drawing showing construction joint locations and pour sequence and elapsed time

between pours for each classification of concrete. 5. For each pour sequence, the method of placement. 6. For each pour sequence, the method of curing the concrete. For wet cures,

indicate the method. For curing compounds, submit manufacturer's instructions for application.

7. Location of cleanouts for wall and column forms, and the method of closing the cleanouts.

8. Description of shoring and reshoring procedure. 9. Type of formwork for each pour. 10. Type of chamfer strips and control joint inserts, if any, for slabs-on-ground. 11. Type of wall ties, indicating break-off points and cones. 12. Method of achieving special finishes as called for. 13. Type and brand name of sealants used. See Section 09900, Painting. 14. Description and manufacturer's instructions for application of epoxy-based

patching compounds. 15. Type of non-shrink grout and manufacturer's instructions for application. C. Maintain a copy of the "Approved" Operations Manual in the field office at all times. D. No deviations will be allowed from products and procedures outlined in the "Approved"

Operations Manual, except when permission is requested in writing and approval for same has been given by the Architect and Engineer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE A. For concrete materials, refer to Section 033000. 2.2 JOINT MATERIALS A. Waterstops: 1. Furnish on of the following waterstops: Synko-Flex by Synko-Flex Products, Inc., Houston, TX Waterstop RX by American Colloid Co., Arlington Hts., IL Swellseal Type CC by De Neef America, Inc. St. Louis, MO 2. Follow manufacturer's requirements for surface preparation, priming, and butt-

splicing. Submit sample, 12 inches [30 cm] long. B. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: See Division 7 of these Specifications. C. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 of these Specifications. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDER A. Provide vapor retarder cover over prepared base material where shown on the

Drawings. Use only materials which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154.

B. Use polyethylene sheets not less than 8 mils [0,3 mm] thick. 2.4 VAPOR BARRIER A. Vapor Barrier: Premolded membrane conforming to ASTM E 96, Method B, O vapor

transmission rate. B. Provide vapor barrier over prepared base material where shown on the Drawings. Use

only materials that are resistant to decay. 2.5 BONDING AND PATCHING MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 03300 for bonding and patching materials. 2.6 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.



Waterproof paper. Polyethylene film. White burlap-polyethylene sheet. B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9

ounces per sq. yd., AASHTO M 182, Class 2. C. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Provide liquid membrane-forming

compound as manufactured by one of the following, and complying with ASTM C 309, Type I (clear), Class B with 18 percent minimum solids.

2.7 CONCRETE SEALER A. Provide concrete sealer where scheduled, as manufactured by one of the following: Euclid Chemical Co. BASF Sonneborn B. The manufacturer is to recommend the product best suited for the applied finishes and

anticipated use of the surface. C. The concrete sealer is to be applied twice. The first application is to be as soon as

possible. The second application is to be colored and applied just prior to the building being turned-over to the Owner.

2.8 LIQUID CONCRETE HARDENER A. Provide liquid concrete hardener where scheduled, as manufactured by one of the

following: Euclid Chemical Co. BASF Sonneborn B. The manufacturer is to recommend the product best suited for the applied finishes and

anticipated use of the surface. 2.9 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. For non-shrink grout materials, refer to Section 03300. See Section 03604 for grout for

column bases. B. Provide for all beam seats bearing on concrete or masonry, all equipment bases, and

other locations noted on the Drawings. Provide non-metallic type only for exposed conditions or where contact with water is anticipated.



C. Conform to CRD-C-621-80, "Corps of Engineers Specifications for Non-Shrink Grout. D. SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT 1. Provide a free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable, cement-based compound for

application from feathered edge to 1 inch thick, as manufactured by one of the following:

Ardex Engineered Cements BASF Sika Products Thoro Systems Products 2. The manufacturer is to recommend the product best suited for the applied finishes

and anticipated use of the surface. 3. Compressive strength: 4100 psi minimum at 28 days. 4. Flexural strength: 750 psi minimum at 28 days. 5. Shrinkage: 0.025 in/in maximum after 7 days. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before formwork installation and prior to placing concrete, thoroughly inspect and verify

that all reinforcing tie wires are bent away from formed surfaces to the specified minimum clearance.

B. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel

and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts in ample time to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required.

C. Before placing concrete: 1. Inspect construction joints in walls through the inspection and clean-out ports in the

formwork. 2. Clean surface of construction joint of all debris, including dust, sawdust, form oil,

and all other foreign objects which will impair bond and water tightness in the joint. 3. Inspect and correct if necessary, the placement, splicing and joining of waterstop. 4. Clean surface of waterstop of all debris and waterstop protective tape. 5. Apply specified bonding agent. 6. Replace, close, support and seal observation and clean-out port closure panel. D. Do not place concrete until completing items 1. through 6. above. E. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where

form coatings are not used. F. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of

forms and reinforcing steel.



G. Before concrete placement, inspect and verify that grades of all earth surfaces used as

concrete forms are correct and that the proper specified clearance is maintained to reinforcing bars.

3.2 CONCRETE CONVEYING A. Handle concrete from the point of delivery and transfer to the concrete conveying

equipment and to the locations of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix materials.

B. Use mechanical equipment for conveying concrete to ensure a continuous flow of

concrete at the delivery end. Erect runways for wheeled concrete conveying equipment from the concrete delivery point to the locations of final deposit. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment, including chutes, free of hardened concrete, debris, water and other deleterious materials.

3.3 PLACEMENT AND CONSOLIDATION OF CONCRETE A. Place concrete in compliance with the practice and recommendations of ACI 304, and as

herein specified. B. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not meet the

required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by foreign materials. Do not use retempered concrete. Remove rejected concrete from the project site and dispose of in an acceptable location.

C. Place a 1 inch to 2 inches [3 to 5 cm] thick layer of pea-gravel concrete, same strength

as that specified for the member, in the bottom of walls and columns prior to placement of the specified concrete to avoid aggregate segregation. This requirement may be waived by Architect if a High Range Water Reducing admixture is used for the columns, piers and walls.

D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be

placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.

E. Deposit concrete into forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a

manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

F. Do not use consolidation equipment (vibrator) to spread concrete. G. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein

specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation.



H. Screed concrete which is to receive other construction to the proper level to avoid excessive skimming or grouting.

I. Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached the elevation

of such spreaders. J. Consolidate concrete placed into forms by mechanical vibrating equipment

supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the recommended practices of ACI 309, to suit the type of concrete and project conditions. Vibration of forms and reinforcing will not be permitted, unless otherwise accepted by the Architect.

K. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside the forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate the layer of concrete and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix.

L. Do not place concrete in supporting elements until the concrete previously placed in

columns and walls is no longer plastic. M. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of

construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. N. Consolidate concrete during placing operations using mechanical vibrating equipment so

that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and to corners. Where concrete cover in excess of 2 inches is called for in walls and columns, consolidate concrete by inserting the mechanical vibrator between the reinforcing curtain and the face of the formwork.

O. Consolidate concrete placed in beams, and against bulkheads of slabs on ground, as

specified for formed concrete structures. Consolidate concrete in the remainder of slabs by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other acceptable methods. Limit the time of vibrating consolidation to prevent bringing an excess of fine aggregate to the surface.

P. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats

or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of high or low areas. Do not sprinkle water or cement on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab prior to beginning the finishing operations.

Q. Maintain reinforcing steel, tie wires and forms in the proper position continuously during

concrete placement operations. 3.4 BONDING A. Roughen surfaces of set concrete at all joints by sandblasting or wire brushing using

power tools, except where bonding is obtained by use of concrete bonding agent, and



clean surfaces of laitance, coatings, loose particles and other foreign matter. Roughen surfaces in a manner to expose bonded aggregate uniformly and to not leave laitance, loose particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the surface.

B. Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to new concrete that has set but is not fully cured,

as follows: 1. At joints between footings and columns, piers and walls and between walls or

columns and beams or slabs they support, and elsewhere unless otherwise specified herein, dampen but do not saturate, the roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete immediately before placing fresh concrete.

2. At joints in exposed work, at vertical joints in walls, at joints in beams, supported slabs and other structural members; apply to the roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete either a commercial bonding agent or neat cement grout.

3. Apply commercial bonding agent in accordance with printed instructions of the manufacturer.

4. Apply neat cement grout, consisting of equal parts by weight of portland cement and aggregate mixed with water to the consistency of thick cream, to dampen concrete surfaces with a stiff broom or brush to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Deposit fresh concrete before grout has attained its initial set.

3.5 HOT WEATHER PLACING A. When hot weather conditions exist (80E F. [26E C] and higher), place concrete in

compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. B. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement

that will not cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash sets or cold joints, but not greater than 90E F. [32E C]. Mixing water with chilled or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature, provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated as part of the total amount of mixing water.

C. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel

temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.

D. Wet wood forms thoroughly before placing concrete. E. Use set-control admixtures when required and accepted in mix designs. 3.6 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. When cold weather conditions exist (40E F. [4E C] or less), place concrete in

compliance with ACI 306 and herein specified. B. Record the date, hour, ambient temperature at the minimum and maximum points within

each 24-hour period, and record the temperature of the concrete at the time of placing.



C. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade. Remove all ice, snow and frost. D. Place concrete at the following temperatures: Ambient Temperature Minimum Temperature of Mix ______________________________________________________ Above 30E F. [0E C] 55E F. [13E C] 0 to 30E F. [-18E to 0E C] 60E F. [16E C] Below 0E F. [-18E C] 65E F. [18E C] ______________________________________________________ E. Do not allow the temperature of the mix to exceed 85E F. [30E C] under any

circumstance. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50E F. [10E C] for at least 72 hours after placement.

F. If the water or aggregate has been heated, combine the water with the aggregate in the

mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when the temperature of the mix is greater than 100E F. [38E C].

G. Do not allow more than a 40E F. [20E C] gradual drop in temperature throughout the first

24 hours, or 5E F. [3E C] in any one-hour period. 3.7 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to

impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect and Engineer. Locate construction joints, if required but not shown, as follows:

1. In columns and piers, at the top of footings; at the top of slabs on ground; and at

the underside of the deepest beam framing into the column or pier. 2. In framed slabs and beams, obtain the Engineer's approval for locating between

the 1/4 and the 1/3 point of the span. 3. In slabs on ground, at approximately 45-foot [14 m] spacing, so as to divide the

slab into square or nearly square areas not in excess of 2000 sq. ft. [180 m2], unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or accepted by the Engineer.

4. In walls, at approximately 60-foot [18 m] spacing. B. Provide formed keyways at least 1? inch [4 cm] deep in construction joints in walls,

slabs, and between footings. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue

reinforcement across construction joints. D. Install waterstops in continuous joints as shown on the Drawings. Install waterstops to

form a continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect waterstops during the progress of the work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Protect waterstop material from damage where it protrudes from any joint.

3.8 ISOLATION JOINTS IN SLABS ON GROUND



A. Install isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground

and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, column base diamonds, foundation walls, and elsewhere as indicated.

B. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in the Division 7 of these Specifications. 3.9 CONTROL JOINTS A. Slabs on Grade: 1. Install control joints in slabs on grade (other than reinforced structural slabs on

grade) to form panels or patterns as shown on the Drawings, or at intervals approximately equal to 30 times the slab thickness.

2. Form control joints by either tooling into fresh concrete, saw cutting into hardened concrete, or using inserts 1/4 inch [6 mm] wide x 1/4 of the slab depth. Perform saw cutting using new saw blades and begin saw cutting between 6 and 12 hours after placement of the concrete, but not so soon as to cause ravelling of the edges.

3. Do not provide control joints in concrete floors under the location of the wood floor system, such as at the gymnasium.

4. Provide joint sealants for all control joints in interior exposed concrete floors (not scheduled to receive a finished covering). Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 of these Specifications.

B. Walls: 1. Install control joints in concrete walls at the spacing shown on the Drawings or at

25'-0" [7,5 m] intervals. 2. Refer to the Drawings for concrete and reinforcing detail at control joints. C. Railings, thin sections: 1. Install control joints in railings and thin sections at the spacing shown on the

Drawings or at 7'-6" [2,5 m] intervals. 2. Refer to the Drawings for concrete and reinforcing detail at control joints. 3.10 CAMBER A. Refer to Section 03100, Concrete Formwork, for camber requirements. 3.11 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: Apply as-cast rough form finish to formed concrete surfaces that are

to be concealed in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. Standard rough form finish is defined as the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched



and all fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch [6 mm] in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth Form Finish: Apply as-cast smooth form finish for formed concrete structures

that are to be exposed-to-view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete, or a covering material bonded to the concrete such as waterproofing, damp-proofing, painting or other similar system.

1. Produce smooth form finish by selecting form materials to impart a smooth, hard,

uniform texture and orderly and symmetrically arranging them with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with all fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Related Unformed surfaces: At tops of walls, tops of railings, horizontal offsets, and other

similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth with trowel and finish with texture matching the adjacent formed surfaces. Continue the final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across the adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Carry vertical rustication joints around the tops of walls, railings and horizontal offsets.

D. Smooth Rubbed Finish: 1. Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received

smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal. 2. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with a carborundum brick or other abrasive until

a uniform color and texture is produced. 3. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 3.12 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive

concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo and other bonded cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise shown on the Drawings. After placing slabs, plane the surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4 inch [6 mm] in 2' [60 cm] when tested with a 2' [60 cm] straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen the surface before the final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.

B. Float Finish (Flt-Fn): Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive

trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing or sand bed terrazzo, and as otherwise shown on Drawings or in schedules.

1. After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface further until ready for floating.

Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared or when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation of a power-driven float, or both. Consolidate the surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level the surface plane to the following tolerances based on ASTM E 1155:



a. Specified Overall Value: FF 25/FL 20. b. Minimum Local Value: FF 20/FL 17. 2. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains.

Immediately after leveling, refloat the surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to

view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with carpet, resilient flooring, paint or other thin-film coating system.

1. After floating, begin the first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel.

Begin final trowelling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface.

2. Consolidate the concrete surface by the final hand trowelling operation free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and with following surface plane tolerances based on ASTM E 1155:

a. Trowel Finish 1 (Tr-Fn1) - Typical Classroom, Corridors, and Normal Sized

Rooms (Under 1,000 sq. ft.). (i) Specified Overall Value: FF 30/FL 23. (ii) Minimum Local Value: FF 25/FL 20. b. Trowel Finish 2 (Tr-Fn2) - Large Rooms and Public Areas (Over 1,000 sq.

ft.). (i) Specified Overall Value: FF 36/FL 25. (ii) Minimum Local Value: FF 30/FL 22. c. Trowel Finish 3 (Tr-Fn3) - Floors to receive wood flooring system. (i) The slab shall be steel trowelled to a true level and finished smooth

and straight to flatness requirements of the wood flooring contractor, and a maximum tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot radius. High spots shall be ground level, and low spots filled in with approved levelling compound by the Contractor responsible for Section 03300 to the full approval of the Architect and flooring contractor.

D. Non-Slip Broom Finish (NsBrm-Fn): Apply non-slip broom finish to top of exposed slabs,

platforms, steps, ramps, and also where shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 1. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by

brooming in the direction perpendicular to the main traffic route or in the pattern shown on the Drawings. Use fiber-bristle broom unless otherwise directed.

2. Coordinate the required final finish with the Architect before application. E. Elevated slabs shall have a specified overall value of FF 22 to FF 27, and a minimum

local value of FF 20 based on ASTM E 1155 with no FL number defined, unless noted.



F. Concrete floor topping on precast planks must maintain minimum thickness stated on the Drawings.

3.13 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or

hot temperature and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free moisture has disappeared from the concrete surface

after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than seventy-two hours.

C. Begin curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before the concrete has

dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days and in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the final curing period.

D. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture retaining cover

curing, membrane curing, or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. For curing, use only water that is free of impurities which could etch or discolor exposed, natural concrete surfaces.

1. Apply moisture curing by any one of the following methods: a. Keeping the surface of the concrete continuously wet by covering with

water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Covering the concrete surface with the specified absorptive cover,

thoroughly saturating the cover with water, and keeping the absorptive cover continuously wet. Place absorptive cover so as to provide coverage of the concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch [10 cm] lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Apply moisture-cover curing as follows: Cover the concrete surfaces with the

specified moisture retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in the widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 4 inches [10 cm] and sealed by waterproofing tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during the curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Apply liquid membrane curing as follows: a. Apply specified membrane-forming curing compound to damp concrete

surfaces as soon as possible after final finishing operations are complete, but no later than 2 hours. Apply uniformly in a continuous operation by power spray equipment or roller equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas which are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours of initial application. Maintain the continuity of the coating and repair damage to the coat during the entire curing period.



b. Do not use membrane curing compounds on exterior or exposed concrete floor surfaces or surfaces which are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or with a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as other concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing , dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.

c. Obtain manufacturer's written certification that any membrane curing compound used on floor slabs receiving applied finish flooring would not impair bonding of adhesive. For slabs which are to receive terrazzo, bonded cementitious materials, epoxy or urethane coatings, use a curing treatment of moisture retaining covers, as described in ACI-301.

E. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed surfaces, including the undersides of girders,

beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces by moist curing with the forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

F. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed, such as slabs, floor topping, and

other flat surfaces by moist curing, whenever possible. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated, by any one of the

methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining

cover, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. G. Temperature of Concrete During Curing: 1. When the atmospheric temperature is 40E F. [4E C] and below, maintain the

concrete temperature between 50E and 70E F. [10E and 20E C] continuously throughout the curing period. When necessary, make arrangements before concrete placing for heating, covering, insulation, or housing as required to maintain the specified temperature and moisture conditions continuously for the concrete curing period.

2. When the atmospheric temperature is 80E F. [25E C] and above, during other climatic conditions which will cause too rapid drying of the concrete, make arrangements before the start of concrete placing for the installation of windbreaks or shading, and for fog spraying, wet sprinkling or moisture-retaining covering. Protect the concrete continuously for the concrete curing periods. Provide hot weather protection complying with the requirements of ACI 305.

3. Maintain concrete temperature as uniformly as possible, and protect from rapid atmospheric changes. Avoid temperature changes in concrete which exceed 5E F. [3E C] in any one hour and 50E F. [30E C] in any 24 hour period.

H. Protection from Mechanical Injury: During the curing period, protect concrete from

damaging mechanical disturbances including loading stresses, vibration from heavy rock excavation, and from damage caused by rain or flowing water. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by subsequent construction operation.

3.14 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS



A. Filling-In: Fill in holes or openings left in concrete members by the passage of work or by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after the work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure epoxy-based patching compound as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide all other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the work.

B. Curbs: Apply monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still

green and steel trowelling surfaces to a hard dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. Extend rustication strips over the top of the curbs forming one continuous line with the vertical rustication strip.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Install equipment bases and foundations, as shown

on the Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing the machines and equipment.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with epoxy-based patching

compound immediately after removal of forms, but only when directed by the Architect. B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/2 inch [1 cm] in any dimension down to

solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch [3 cm]. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing epoxy-based patching compound, thoroughly clean surfaces to be repaired as required by manufacturer's specifications. Compact in place and strike off slightly higher than the surrounding surface.

C. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Repair exposed-to-view formed concrete surfaces, where

possible, that contain defects which adversely affect the appearance of the finish. Remove and replace the concrete having defective surfaces if the defects cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles larger than 1/4 inch [6 mm], honeycomb, rock pockets, fins, and other projections on the surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs

secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed concrete surfaces, where possible, that contain defects

that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete having defective surfaces. Surface defects, as such, include cracks of any width and other surface deficiencies which penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections, honeycomb, rock pockets, and spalls, except minor breakage at corners.

D. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs , for

smoothness and to verify surface plane to the tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct high areas as herein specified.



1. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having the required slope.

2. Correct high and low areas as herein specified. 3. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect the

durability of the concrete. Surface defects, as such, including crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 inch [0,25 mm] wide or which penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

E. High and Low Areas: Test floor areas for high and low spots that are not in conformance

with the flatness tolerances. 1. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after the concrete has cured

sufficiently so that repairs can be made without damage to adjacent areas. 2. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of

surface finishing operations by cutting out the low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Proprietary compounds may be used when acceptable to the Architect.

F. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with epoxy-based patching compound. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Follow manufacturer's instructions for application of epoxy-based patching compound. Where Architect or Engineer permits patching with fresh concrete, dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and brush with a neat cement grout coating, or use concrete bonding agent. Place patching concrete before concrete takes its initial test. Mix patching concrete of the same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as the original adjacent concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.

G. Repair cracks, holes, and other defects in pits by the epoxy-injection method as directed

by the Architect and Engineer. 3.16 CLEAN DOWN A. Clean all concrete surfaces, interior and exterior, with a mild solution of detergent and

water. Apply the solution by scrubbing vigorously with a soft bristle brush, and then flush with water.

3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Refer to Section 03300 for testing of cast-in-place concrete.

END OF SECTION 033100


CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03 32 00 - 1

SECTION 03 32 00

CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This Section supplements the project drawings and specifies project technical

requirements, and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, curing, testing and final acceptance of concrete floor topping for this project.


Conditions, and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 032520: Anchors and Inserts Section 033000: Concrete - General Section 033100: Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of Section 033000. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish data, samples, laboratory test reports, and material certificates as specified in

Section 033000. B. Polypropylene fibers: 1. Submit manufacturer's printed product data, clearly marked, indicating proposed

fibrous concrete reinforcement materials. Printed data should state 1.5 pounds of fiber to be added to each cubic yard [1 kg per 1 m3] of concrete.

2. Submit evidence of at least 5 years satisfactory performance history under the

same trade name and manufacturer, and compliance with applicable building codes and ASTM C-1018 and C-1116.

3. Submit manufacturer's printed batching and mixing instructions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cement and Aggregates: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. 2. Standard Aggregate: ASTM C 33, and as follows a. Fine Aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screening, clean,

hard, free from deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:

3/8" [10.0mm] : 100 percent No. 4 [5.0mm] : 95 - 100 percent No. 8 [2.5mm] : 80 - 90 percent No. 16 [1.2mm] : 50 - 75 percent b. Coarse Aggregate, consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hark, free

from deleterious matter. Graded by weight to pass sieves as follows: 1/2" [12.5mm] : 100 percent 3/8" [10.0mm] : 30 - 50 percent No. 4 [5.0mm] : 0 - 15 percent No. 8 [2.5mm] : 0 - 5 percent B. Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, Welded Wire Fabric (flat sheets only). C. Polypropylene fibers: Conform to ASTM C-1018 and ASTM C-1116, Type III Section

4.1.3 and 4.2 and Performance Level 1 Toughness Index I5, 100% virgin homopolymer polypropylene fibrillated fibers containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Use a minimum volume of 0.1%, or 1.5 pounds per cu.yd. [1 kg/m3] minimum.

D. Topping mix 1. Standard Topping: Design mix to produce topping material with the following

characteristics: a. Compressive strength: 3500 psi [250 kg/cm2, 25 MPa] in 28 days. b. Slump: 8 inches [20 cm] maximum at point of placement for concrete

containing high-range water-reducing admixture and 3 inches [8 cm] maximum for other concrete.

c. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.51.



E. Concrete Admixtures: Refer to Section 033000. F. Structural Bonding Compounds: Refer to Section 033000. 2.2 MIXING A. Provide batch type mechanical mixer for mixing topping material at project site. Equip

batch mixer with a suitable charging hopper, water storage tank, and a water-measuring device.

B. Use only mixers which are capable of mixing aggregates, cement, fibers and water into a

uniform mix within specified time, and of discharging mix without segregation. C. Mix concrete in strict accordance with fiber reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations for uniform and complete distribution. As a minimum, mix each batch of 2 cu. yds. [2 m3] or less for at least 15 minutes after ingredients are in mixer. Increase mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. [m3] or fraction thereof.

D. Ready-mixed topping may be used when acceptable to the Architect. When acceptable,

furnish ready-mixed topping complying with requirements of ASTM C 94. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove dirt, loose material, oil, grease, paint or other contaminants, leaving a clean

surface. B. Prior to placing topping mixture, thoroughly dampen slab surface but do not leave

standing water. Over dampened surface , apply specified bonding compound or epoxy adhesive. Place topping mix after re-wettable bonding compound has dried or while non-rewettable bonding compound or epoxy adhesive is still tacky.

C. Provide necessary chairs or reinforcing supports, and maintain position of reinforcing

mesh. D. Mark location of joints in base slab and place the joints in top course directly over them. 3.2 PLACING AND COMPACTING A. Float Finish: Spread topping mixture evenly over prepared base to the required

elevation and strikeoff. Use highway straightedge, bull float, or darby to level surface. After the topping has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation, and water sheen has disappeared, float the surface at least twice to a uniform sandy texture. Restraighten where necessary with highway straightedge. See Section 033000 for tolerance.



B. Trowel Finish: After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power driven trowels. Continue troweling until surface is ready to receive final troweling. Begin final troweling when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface.

3.3 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Cure to protect topping applications and finishes as specified in Section 033000. 3.4 ACCEPTANCE A. Failure of concrete topping to bond to substrate (as evidenced by a hollow sound when

tapped), or disintegration or other failure of topping to perform as a floor finish, will be considered failure of materials and workmanship. Repair or replace toppings in areas of such failures, as directed.



CEMENTITIOUS ROOF DECK 03 51 13 - 1

SECTION 03 51 13

CEMENTITIOUS ROOF DECK

(CEMENTITIOUS WOOD FIBER PLANK) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Cementitious wood fiber plank roof deck and form system, including subpurlins.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 5 Sections: Steel Framing.

2. Division 7 Sections: Roofing.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C177 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.

2. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

3. ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

4. ASTM D1621 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

5. ASTM D2842 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

6. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 580 Standard for Safety for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Provide roof deck assembly designed and tested according to the following:

1. Underwriters Laboratories UL 580 (UL Class 90 Design)

B. Performance Requirements:



1. Provide a roof deck system that has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to provide deflection of Less than L/240 at design load.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating locations and spacing of planks and purlins.

D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples as follows:

1. Set of 12 inch (305 mm) square samples for each wood fiber deck unit required, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed work.

2. Labeled set of all accessories required for a complete installation.

E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test Reports: Upon request, submit certified test reports from recognized test laboratories.

2. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Warranty documents specified herein.


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

1. Provide labels indicating brand name, deck style, plank size and plank thickness.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

1. Prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.

2. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract



documents.

1. Warranty Period (Thermal for Tectum III): 15 years beginning with date of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ROOF DECK AND FORM SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturer: Tectum Inc.

1. Contact: 105 South Sixth Street, Newark, OH 43055; Telephone: (888) 977-9691, (740) 345-9691; Fax: (800) 832-8869; E-mail: [email protected]; website: www.tectum.com.

B. Proprietary Systems. Cementitious deck formboard systems, including the following configurations:

1. Tectum Roof Deck Plank.

2.02 ROOF DECK PANEL COMPONENTS

A. Proprietary Products. Cementitious deck formboard products, including the following:

1. Tectum III Roof Deck Panels:

a. Material: Aspen wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement, bonded to Styrofoam brand foam insulation, bonded to top surface of 7/16 inch (11.1 mm) oriented strand board (OSB).

b. Nominal Panel Thickness: Design to Match existing thickness of roof panels, +/- 6”.

c. Insulation Water Vapor Permeability (ASTM E96): 0.6 perm (34 ng/(Pa × s × m2)).

d. Insulation Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): 40 psi (276 kPa).

e. Insulation Water Absorption (ASTM D2842): 1% by volume.

f. Insulation Linear Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 3.5 × 10E5 in/in/deg F.

g. Insulation Thermal Resistance: R-value R5 per inch.

h. EPS Core Compliance (ASTM C578): Exceeds Type IV.

i. OSB meets Voluntary Product Standard PS2-92 Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide accessories as follows:

1. Bulb-Tee Subpurlins:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Style: [218] [As indicated on drawings] [Specify style.].

c. Manufacturer: Western Fireproofing Co., Kansas City, MO.

2. Tectum Grout:



a. Material: Gypsum cement grout, ready for mixing with potable water.

3. Tectum Screws:

a. Material: Steel.

4. Construction Adhesive:

a. Manufacturer: Miracle Construction Adhesive.

b. Type: Adhesive SFA-66.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the roof deck panel manufacturer.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of roof deck panel system.

2. Do not proceed with installation of roof deck panel system until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Deck Plank Installation:

1. Place planks on joists with square cut ends butted tightly together.

a. Stagger end joints.

b. Tectum panels must be supported by bent plates (steel or other support) at all transitions of the roof. This includes but is not limited to the ridge, valleys, perimeter and panel direction change. Panels must have a minimum of 1 inch bearing and should be glued and screwed at these transitions.

c. Panel ends must fall over structural supports and have a minimum of 1 inch bearing.

2. Secure planks to joists with screws and spacing recommended by plank manufacturer.

3. Do not allow foot traffic on planks until after screws are installed.

4. Apply adhesive recommended by manufacturer to ensure diaphragm performance as designed.

B. Roof Deck Formboard Installation:

1. Cut plank neatly to abut parapets, around openings and penetrations.


C. Roof Deck Composite Plank:

1. Cut plank neatly to abut parapets, around openings and penetrations.




3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of all deck surfaces.

B. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of structural damage.

C.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work from damage due to weather related moisture.

B. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.



GROUT FOR COLUMN BASES 03 60 40 - 1

SECTION 03 60 40

GROUT FOR COLUMN BASES


and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, curing, testing and final acceptance of grout for column based of this Project.


Conditions, and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 010000: General Requirements Section 033000: Concrete - General Section 051000: Structural Steel 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform the grouting work in conformance with the procedures recommended by the

manufacturer of the grout. B. Submit certificates of compliance from the manufacturer of the grout or from a

recognized Testing Agency confirming compliance with these Specifications. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements, for additional information.

C. Cooperate with a field service representative of the grout manufacturer during initial

planning for mixing, placing and curing of the grout, as well as the start of placing the grout.

D. Testing and Inspection: 1. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with Division 1. 2. Make a set of two-inch cubes for compression testing of the grout. Make at least

one set of cubes for each day of grouting or for each ten bases or portion thereof grouted per day.



E. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the latest edition of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. ASTM C 109-88 "Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic cement

Mortars (Using 2-inch or 50 mm cube specimens) 2. ASTM C 309-89 "Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete" 3. Corps of Engineers CRD-C 79 "Method of Test for Flow of Grout Mixtures" (flow

cone method) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 033000. B. Use a membrane curing compound which conforms to ASTM C 309. C. Use potable water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Assure that concrete surfaces to receive grout are free of laitance, clean, rough and

reasonably level and have been wet cured. B. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces to receive grout. C. Assure that steel base plate surfaces to be in contact with grout are clean, free of oil,

grease, dirt and loose particles. D. Assure that bolt holes in base plates are clean, free of oil, grease, dirt and loose

particles. E. Saturate concrete, forms and bolt holes immediately before placing grout. F. Remove free water from forms, concrete and bolt holes immediately prior to grouting. 3.2 FORMWORK A. Design and construct formwork to be rigid, mortar-tight, providing rapid, continuous and

complete filling of the space to be grouted. B. Slant forms 45E on placing side to facilitate placing the grout.



C. Use side forms which are not be less than 1/2 inch clear of base plate (horizontally) and

at least one inch higher than the bottom surface of the base plate. D. Assure mortar-tightness of form by caulking the outside form joints using mortar made of

sand and portland cement or by other methods recommended by the manufacturer and satisfactory to the Architect and Engineer.

3.3 MIXING A. Perform mixing as per the manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform mixing adjacent to the location where the grout is to be placed in a rapid and

continuous manner, avoiding excess water, and hence, bleeding. C. Do not retemper grout. D. Maintain a placing temperature between 45degrees F and 75degrees F. E. In hot weather, use iced water to control grout temperature during mixing and placing. F. Do not vibrate grout nor overwork it by puddling excessively. 3.4 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Leave forms in place, cover exposed surfaces with wet burlap or other means

acceptable to the Architect and Engineer and maintain at 45 degrees F to 75 degrees F for 24 hours or more after placing and above 40 degrees Fahrenheit thereafter until a cube compression strength of 4000 psi has been attained, on field-cured cubes.

B. Membrane-forming curing compound may be used after 24 hours if permitted by the

Architect and Engineer. C. Do not cure grout by the use of coke-fired salamanders.



DRAINAGE MAT 04 05 25 - 1

SECTION 04 05 25

DRAINAGE MAT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall moisture/vapor drainage mat.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09 30 00 – Tile, Mortar, Grout & Waterproofing

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years production of similar products.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years experience as a masonry installer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Keene Building Products; PO Box 241353, Mayfield Heights, Ohio 44124. Toll Free Tel: (877) 514-5336, Tel: (440) 605-1020. Fax:



(440) 605-1120. Email: [email protected]. Web: http://www.KeeneBuilding.com.

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 25 00.

2.2 DRAINAGE MAT

A. Drainage Mat: Randomly oriented geometric patterned drainage and ventilation mat designed to eliminate moisture and moisture vapor in wall applications.

B. Product: Driwall Rainscreen 020-1 as manufactured by Keene Building Products.

1. Physical Characteristics: Three dimensional mat heat laminated to a non-woven lightweight, vapor permeable fabric. The monofilament mat is heat welded at the junctions to form a resilient structure that isolates veneer from the back-up.

a. 0.25 inches (6 mm) thick.

b. 14.5 oz/sq. yd. (489 g/sq m) total weight.

c. 48 inches (123 mm) wide.

d. 100 feet (30.6 m) roll length.

2. Performance:

a. Drainage of moisture and ventilation between veneer and back-up support.

3. Material: UV stabilized polypropylene.

a. Class A flame spread per ASTM E84.

b. Hydrophobic compound.

c. Resistant to chemicals.

d. Does not support mold growth.

C. Application:

1. Provide at exterior porcelain tile veneer and as indicated or required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.



B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 DRAINAGE MAT INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Inspection of Wall Conditions and Weather Barrier/Building Wrap: Assure that the wall is free from structural defects, that any membranes or flashing are properly installed and that the final system will have a path for moisture to escape from the wall.

C. Installation for Manufactured Stone and Thin Set Natural Stone:

1. Install building membrane and flashing to manufactures recommendations.

2. Place drainage mat horizontally against exterior wall fabric side out, entangled core to the building interior. Starting at the bottom of the wall, position the first piece of drainage mat where the bottom edge of the stone will meet the ledger board.

3. Mechanically fasten with a staple hammer, large head nail or washer and screw one fastener for each square foot (0.1 sq. m). When installing over concrete or block back-up walls that do not accept mechanical fasteners hold in place with small dabs of glue every two feet (610 mm). Do not fasten through flashing.

4. Seam adjacent piece with the selvage edge overlapping the top of the lower drainage mat piece.

5. Install expanded metal lathe over the drainage mat according to the stone manufacturer’s recommendations.

6. Apply scratch coat according to exterior tile manufacturer’s recommendations.

7. Install exterior tile according to guidelines. Provide a weep method for ventilation and drainage mat.

8. Trim drainage mat around all penetrations, windows and doors so that the material is flush to the flashing.



Issued For Bidding

UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 1

SECTION 042000

UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Steel reinforcing bars. 4. Ties and anchors. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications"

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.


A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.


Issued For Bidding


1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength.

2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

4. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength.

5. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.

6. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.


A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties.


Issued For Bidding


b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."


Issued For Bidding



A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with

painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain

from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit


Issued For Bidding


masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2150 psi (14.8 MPa)

2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal

dimensions.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.


Issued For Bidding


D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to

produce required mortar color.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

F. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors.

G. Refractory Mortar Mix: Ground fireclay or non-water-soluble, calcium aluminate, medium-duty refractory mortar that passes ASTM C 199 test; or an equivalent product acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.

I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar

Admixture.

J. Water: Potable.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).


Issued For Bidding


A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407

mm) o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) wide, plus 2 side rods at each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) wide or less.

2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with 1 side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

3. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face..

2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

4. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

5. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch (1.5 to 2.5 mm) made from 0.030-inch- (0.76-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.


Issued For Bidding


C. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

D. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide.

1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches (50 mm) long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units.

2. Where wythes do not align, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire ties may be used in interior walls unless otherwise indicated.

E. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows:

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).

2. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the following types of anchors:

3. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213. 2) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316 or Pos-I-Tie. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10 o] [DW-10-X]. 4) Wire-Bond; 1004, Type III, RJ-711 or SureTie.


Issued For Bidding


b. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (76 mm) high; with projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section.

c. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch (16 mm) wide by 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie.

d. Anchor Section: Corrosion-resistant, self-drilling, eye-screw designed to receive wire tie. Eye-screw has spacer that seats directly against framing and is same thickness as sheathing and has gasketed, washer head that covers hole in sheathing.

e. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.075-inch- (1.90-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

f. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel] [stainless-steel wire.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.

B. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

C. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.

1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick. 2. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16-oz./sq. ft. (4.9-

kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick or ASTM B 370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet, 12-oz./sq. ft. (3.7-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0162 inch (0.41 mm) thick.


Issued For Bidding


3. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

4. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel or copper, with ribs at 3-inch (76-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail). 2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking

Thruwall Flashing. 3) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Mechanically Keyed Flashing.

5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing.

6. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

7. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

8. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees[ and hemmed.

9. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

10. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing, Copper Sealtite 2000.

2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-Wall Flashing.

3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. 5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 6) York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 500.


Issued For Bidding


2. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Cop-R-Cote. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Coated

Thru-Wall Flashing. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Coat Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type ACC-Asphalt Bituminous Coated. 5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Coated Copper Flashing.

3. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).


1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal. 2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall

Flashing. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier

Thru-Wall Flashing. 4) Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. 5) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-

Barrier Wall Flashing. 6) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-

Wall Flashing. 7) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. 8) W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing. 9) Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300 or Polyguard 400. 10) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Sando-Seal. 11) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.

b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.

C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use

metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face,

use metal flashing or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge.


Issued For Bidding


4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.

D. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers that prevent UV degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed to be built into mortar bed joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Blok-Flash.

E. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

2. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 3. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane sealant; of type,

grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity. Use only for weeps.


Issued For Bidding


2. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch (9-mm) OD by 4 inches (100 mm) long.

3. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.


1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 4) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

4. Aluminum Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, L-shaped units made from sheet aluminum, designed to fit into a head joint and consisting of a vertical channel with louvers stamped in web and with a top flap to keep mortar out of the head joint; painted before installation to comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" in color selected by Architect.


1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #343W - Wilko Weep Hole.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break II. b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

2. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.

b. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.


Issued For Bidding


c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity. d. Sheets or strips not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and installed to full

height of cavity with additional strips 4 inches (100 mm) high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth of cavity and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.

2.9 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

A. Loose-Granular Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water repellency and to limit dust generation).

B. Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578, Type I. Provide specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units.


a. Concrete Block Insulating Systems; Korfil. b. Shelter Enterprises Inc.; Omni Core.

2.10 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, closed-cell product extruded with an integral skin.

B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type I.

C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I (aluminum-foil-faced), Class 2 (glass-fiber-reinforced).

D. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.

2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.


Issued For Bidding


b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be

exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated[ or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet

walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

E. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Application: Use epoxy pointing mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Pre-faced CMUs.


Issued For Bidding


b. Glazed brick. c. Glazed structural-clay facing tile.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.


Issued For Bidding


G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).


Issued For Bidding


5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.


Issued For Bidding


3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.

4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick and CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course

on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting

course on footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch (19 mm) or more in width.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 COMPOSITE MASONRY

A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:

1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 4.5 sq. ft. (0.42 sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (914 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically.

a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties.

2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.


Issued For Bidding


a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.

B. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.

C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units as well as masonry bonding.

D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows:

1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. 2. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-

shaped units. 3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. If used with

hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.

3.7 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:

1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 4.5 sq. ft. (0.42 sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 36 inches (914 mm)o.c. horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (915 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically.

a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties.

b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.


Issued For Bidding


c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

3. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.

B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.

C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

D. Parge cavity face of backup wythe in a single coat approximately 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick. Trowel face of parge coat smooth.

E. Apply air barrier to face of backup wythe to comply with Section 07 27 26 "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers."

F. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.

1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry.

3.8 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

A. Pour granular insulation into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been confirmed. Limit the fall of insulation to 1 story high, but not more than 20 feet (6 m).

B. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.

3.9 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls

and parapet walls.


Issued For Bidding


3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm), and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches (50 mm) on interior face.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

4. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

5. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.


Issued For Bidding


2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.

3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 4. Space weep holes formed from wicking material 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 5. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.

E. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), to maintain drainage.

F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

G. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.12 PARGING

A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:


Issued For Bidding


1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. 9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana

Limestone Handbook."

3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished

grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 10 0 - 1

SECTION 05 10 00

STRUCUTRAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This Section supplements the project drawings and specifies project technical

requirements, and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, and identifies governing codes and standards for fabrication, erection, inspection, testing, and final acceptance of structural steel components of this Project.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,

Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 010000: General Requirements Section 032520 Anchors and Inserts Section 036040 Grout for Column Bases Section 053100 Metal Deck Section 055000 Metal Fabrications 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the latest edition of the following


1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" 2. AISC " Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural

Steel for Buildings" and including the "Commentary" and Supplements thereto as issued.

3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"

(as approved November 13, 1985). 4. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" 5. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials, as specified herein. 6. Ohio Building Code, 2009 Edition



7. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure."

8. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily

passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. 9. If re-certification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's

responsibility. B. Maintain a direct channel of communication with the Engineer, and keep the

General Contractor informed of the subject of such communication. 1.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test materials prior to fabrication for base metal weldability, defects

and non-conformance with these Specifications. Inspect material surfaces for inclusions, cracks, discontinuities where weld metal will be deposited.

B. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not

comply. C. Provide ongoing in-house inspection and testing to verify that quality of fabrication

and erection is in conformance with the Contract Documents. 1.6 DESIGN OF MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS A. The Engineer has responsibility and authority for all aspects of structural design. B. The Fabricator has responsibility and authority for properly implementing the

project drawings, properly furnishing materials and workmanship, maintaining the specified fabrication and erection tolerances, and for fit and erectability of the structure.

C. Promptly notify Engineer prior to Bid Submission whenever design of members and

connections for any portion of the structure, including its stability as a whole is not clearly understood from the Contract Documents.

D. Arrange for a conference with the Engineer prior to the preparation of the Shop

Drawings to identify lines of communication, procedures, design standards, contract requirements, scope of work, and to identify changes to the Contract Documents to be proposed by the Fabricator and/or Erector.

E. Details shown on the project drawings are typical; similar details apply to similar

conditions, unless specifically detailed otherwise. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing any delay in work.

F. The Fabricator is required to retain the services of a Specialty Engineer who is a

professional structural engineer, registered in the state where the Project is located, and paid by the Fabricator. The Specialty Engineer will design the shear and moment connections and oversee the detailing of the connections on the shop drawings.



G. The Fabricator's engineer is required to detail all standard beam connections,

which are not specifically detailed or for which no reaction is specified on the project drawings, in accordance with AISC "Framed Beam Connections," Tables II and III, pages 4-9 through 4-26 of the "Manual of Steel Construction," and is required to submit to the Engineer for review and approval. Do not use ASTM A 307 bolts. The minimum required strength of such connections is equal to the end reaction, W/2, indicated for the appropriate beam and span, laterally supported, in the "Allowable Loads on Beams" Tables on pages 2-33 through 2-140 of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Ninth Edition. Where a reaction is shown on the project drawings, the minimum required strength of standard clip angle connections is the indicated reaction force.

H. The Fabricator's engineer is required to detail all beam-to-beam and beam to

column moment connections. These moment connections are indicated and located on the drawings. The Fabricator may use the type of moment connections indicated on the drawings, or the Fabricator's preferred or standard moment connections. Where moment and shear reactions are shown on the drawings, the minimum strength of the connections is the indicated moment and shear. Where no reactions are given, the moment connection must develop a minimum moment equal to the flange force multiplied by the distance between centerlines of flanges, and a minimum shear of 0.65 times W, indicated for the appropriate beam and span, laterally supported, in the "Allowable Loads on Beams" Tables on pages 2-33 through 2-140 of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Ninth Edition.

I. The Fabricator's engineer is required to detail all truss member connections and

splice connections which are not specifically detailed on the drawings. J. Do not change any detail from that shown on the project drawings without first

notifying the Engineer of the intent of substitution in writing and obtaining the Engineer's written approval of the same.

K. The Engineer's approval will not relieve the Fabricator from responsibility for

delays, extra work and conflict with other trades or with other elements of the Project caused by the revised detail.

L. The Fabricator's proposed revision to a connection must be designed by a licensed

professional structural engineer, engaged and paid by the Fabricator. Base such design on the Engineer's specified criteria regarding strength, stiffness, appearance, and other considerations, which criteria must be obtained by the Fabricator prior to the commencement of the design of the revision to a connection. The Fabricator, at his option, may select the Engineer for such design of a revision.

M. The method and detail of splicing of multi-story columns, in accordance with AISC,

is the Fabricator's choice, except where such splice is specifically detailed on the project drawings.

N. Splicing, cutting, notching, or other alterations to structural steel members not

specifically indicated on the project drawings are not permitted without written authorization of the Engineer.



1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit four (4) copies of each of each producer's or manufacturer's

specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these Specifications (including specified standards).

1. Structural Steel (each type) 2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 3. Unfinished bolts and nuts, if used. 4. Structural steel primer paint. 5. Shrinkage resistance grout. 6. Slide bearing assembly. B. Proposed Details: Submit (4) copies of proposed typical standard beam connection

details and details of proposed column splices which Paragraph 1.06 above invites the Fabricator to develop. Do not begin development of Shop Drawings until such details have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. Do not include with this submission proposed changes to connections and splices fully detailed on the project drawings which need to be submitted as outlined in Paragraph 1.06 above.

C. Signed and Sealed Calculations: Near the conclusion of the structural steel shop

drawing process, submit (2) copies of signed and sealed calculations along with a letter from the Specialty Engineer, indicating that the shop drawings represent the design intent of the calculations.

1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings, prepared under the supervision of a professional engineer.

Include complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures, and diagrams showing the sequence of erection.

B. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld.

C. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts

and other anchorages to be installed be others. D. Indicate on Erection Plans all temporary bracing, strong-backs, guys, and supports

deemed necessary for completion of this work, including the forces such temporary members must support. Outline sequence and procedures for removing temporary supports.



E. Approval of shop drawings by the Architect and Engineer stipulates verification of the Fabricator's proper interpretation of the design shown on the project drawings and the intent of the Contract Documents. Approval of shop drawings does not indicate acceptance of deviations from Contract Documents, unless accepted by the Engineer in writing prior to submission of shop drawings. Conflicts resulting from such deviations, conflicts between this work and the work of other trades due to such deviations, and dimensional conflicts as a result of such deviations shall be deemed Fabricator's responsibility.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep

steel members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Rolled Steel W Shapes: ASTM A 992 Plates, Other Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36 B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. D. Stainless Steel: AISI #316. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type, unless noted otherwise on plans.

Nuts for these bolts shall be ASTM A 563, Hex Grade A. F. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy

hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers,

complying with ASTM A 325. 2. Quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts, nuts, and washers complying with

ASTM A 490. G. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with Table 3.1 of AWS D1.1. H. Shear Connectors (Headed Studs): Shear connectors and their installation shall

meet all requirements specified in Section 7 of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel", including but not limited to the following:

1. Conforming to ASTM A108. 2. Minimum tensile strength 60,000 psi tested in accordance with applicable

sections of ASTM A370.



3. Sizes of shear connectors shall be minimum after welding and shall be as specified on the project drawings.

I. Structural Steel Primer Paint 1. Exposed to weather: inorganic zinc-rich primer compatible with finish paint

specified under Section 09900, Painting. 2. Protected steel: Fabricator's standard. J. Steel items to be zinc-coated (galvanized) shall be coated in accordance with

ASTM A 123 with a minimum of 2.5 oz. of zinc per square foot. K. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Non-Metallic: for use in areas where grout is exposed to view in the finished

design, weather, water, or chemicals. Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CRD-C 621-89. Provide non-metallic, non-shrink grout as manufactured by one of the following:

Euco N-S by The Euclid Chemical Co. Gilco Const. Grout by The Euclid Chemical Co. Set-Grout by BASF Sonogrout by Sonneborn Building Products Upcon by Upco Chem. Div., USM Corp. Five Star Grout by U.S. Grout Corp. 2. Metallic: For use in areas where grout is not exposed to view, or is protected

from weather, water, or chemicals. Pre-mixed, containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with "Corps of Engineers Specifications for Non-Shrink Grout," CRD-C 621-89. Provide metallic non-shrink grout as manufactured by one of the following:

Supreme Plus by W.R. Grace & Co. Embeco 885 by BASF Ferrolith G by Sonneborn Building Products 3. Refer to Section 03604 for grout for column bases. L. Slide Bearing Assembly: Tetrafluoroethylene, reinforced with glass fibers and

applied to stainless steel or structural steel plates, as manufactured by the following:

Fluorogold by Fluorocarbon Co. Con-Slide by Con-Serve, Inc. Fabreeka PTFE by Fabreeka Products Co. PTFE Slide Bearings by Victor Jay Associates,Inc.



2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in

the shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on approved Shop Drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for

delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units,

before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, notches, irregularities, and other defects.

2.3 CONNECTIONS A. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. No substitutions are allowed without

written permission. B. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are

indicated. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections.

C. Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for

Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". D. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance, and

quality of welds, and methods used in corrected welding work. Assemble and weld sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp.

E. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural

steel framing, as shown on approved shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

F. Preparation of Holes, Thermally Cut and Sheared Edges: Thermal cutting shall

preferably be done by machine. Thermally cut edges in all truss chords and hangers and other tension members, or which are to have weld metal deposited on them, shall be free from notches and gouges. Plane and finish all sheared edges which are to be welded.

2.4 SHOP PAINTING A. Shop paint structural steel work except those members which are embedded in

concrete. 1. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with

friction-type connections.



2. Apply two (2) coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly

or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be

painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean all steel not exposed to view in accordance with SSPC-SP 3 “Power Tool Cleaning”. Steel that is architecturally exposed is to be cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning".

C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural primer paint in

accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 to 3.5 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. Avoid runs, blisters and sags.

D. Apply a bituminous coating over steel surfaces which will be in contact with mortar. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Comply with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein

specified. B. Surveys: Employ a surveyor to establish permanent bench marks required for steel

erection, check lines and elevations of concrete bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices before steel erection proceeds. Report discrepancies to the Architect immediately. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect.

C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking, working platforms, and welding

platforms, all in compliance with State and Federal OSHA Regulations, as necessary to effectively complete the work.

D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing

structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and

other anchors to accurate locations. 2. Refer to Section 033100, Cast-in-Place Concrete, for anchor bolt installation

requirements. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete bearing surfaces of bond-

reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates.



1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices.

2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and

plumbed. Impact tools are not permitted for tightening nuts on anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure

that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Coordinate erection with other work on Project and other trades, including

sequencing erection with subsequent backfilling operations, which affect erection procedures.

3.2 FIELD ASSEMBLY A. Set structural frames accurately to lines, elevations and cambers indicated. Align

and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

B. Level and plumb individual member of structure within specified AISC tolerances. C. Establishing required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating

temperature of structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at the time of erection and mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service.

D. Expansion joint dimensions shown on the drawing are the minimum clear

dimensions across the joint at a temperature of 75� F. Appropriate compensation shall be made for the temperature of the steel at the time of erection. Expansion joints shall be detailed to be free of any obstruction.

3.3 MEMBER SPLICES A. Splice members only where indicated on the project drawings unless requested in

writing and approved by the Engineer in writing. B. Such written request to the Engineer to splice must ask for quantitative and

qualitative information regarding forces, stresses, clearances at the splice, and desired method and appearance of the splice itself. Do not proceed with splice detail until Engineer submitted his approval and the above information in writing.

3.4 ERECTION BOLTS A. On Exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds

and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.



3.5 OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections,

alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. B. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in

secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.6 GAS CUTTING A. Do not use gas cutting torches in field for connecting fabrication errors in structural

framing. Cutting will be permitted in secondary members only which are not under stress, as acceptable to Engineer. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

3.7 TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner will engage and pay for an independent testing and inspection agency

to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.

B. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether

test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations there from.

C. Provide access for testing agency so that required inspection and testing can be

accomplished. D. The testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however

Architect and Engineer reserve right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with specified requirements.

E. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test

reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work.

F. Testing agency will do the following: 1. Inspect shop bolted connections in accordance with AISC Specifications. 2. During fabrication, verify certification of welders.



3. During and after erection, inspect and test shop and field welds, as follows: a. Verify certification of welders, re-certify if necessary. Conduct

inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies.

b. Perform visual inspection of all welds. c. Perform Magnetic Particle Inspection, ASTM E 709, on root pass and on

finished weld of all full penetration butt welds, including adjacent base metal, and edges of weld access holes and cope holes. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not acceptable.

d. Perform Ultrasonic Inspection, ASTM E 164 of all welds 3/8 inch or

larger, or any weld that failed to pass visual inspection. G. Contractor shall correct all deficiencies as required by Engineer.



STEEL JOISTS 05 21 0 - 1

SECTION 05 21 00

STEEL JOISTS


and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, and identifies governing codes and standards for fabrication, erection, inspection, and final acceptance of steel joists for this Project.


Conditions, and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 010000: General Requirements Section 032520: Anchors and Inserts Section 051000: Structural Steel Section 053100: Steel Deck Section 055000: Metal Fabrications 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications

and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. SJI - "Standard Specifications, Load Tables & Weight Tables for Steel Joists &

Joist Girders," 1994 Editions. 2. SJI - "Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist

Girders," except where amended herein or by governing codes. 3. AISC "Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings" and including the "Commentary" and Supplements thereto as issued. 4. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and

including the "Commentary" and Supplements thereto as issued. B. Qualification of Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1-

96.



C. Joists welded in place are subject to inspection and testing. Remove and replace any

work found to be defective and provide new and acceptable work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements, for additional information. B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation

instructions for each type of joist and its accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJI Specifications. This submission is for record only, and may not be returned.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special

connections, jointing and accessories. Include the mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bridging.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in the SJI Specifications. Handle

and store joists in an manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI Specifications. B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low

carbon steel. C. High-Strength Threaded fasteners: ASTM A 325 or A 490 heavy hexagon structural

bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers. D. Steel Prime Paint: 1. Comply with SJI Specifications. Use manufacturer's standard, compatible with

finish paint specified in Division 9, unless noted. 2. Inorganic zinc-rich primer compatible with finish paint specified in Division 9, for all

steel joists and joist accessories exposed to the elements in the finished state and all steel that does not occur in conditioned space and is inaccessible due to enclosure by finishes.

2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI Specifications.



B. Holes in Chord Members: Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing

other work to the steel joists; however, deduct area of holes from the area of the chord when calculating the strength of the member.

C. Extended Ends: Provide extended ends on joists where shown, complying with the

manufacturer's standards and requirements of SJI Specifications and Load Tables. D. Ceiling Extensions: Provide ceiling extensions in areas having ceilings attached directly

to joist bottom chords. Provide either an extended bottom chord element or a separate unit, to suit manufacturer's standards, of sufficient strength to support the ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2" of the finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.

E. Bridging: Provide horizontal and diagonal bridging, complying with SJI Specifications

and the Recommended Code of Standard Practice, except as follows: 1. If bridging member sizes are called out on the Drawings, either by schedule, by a

typical detail, or in spot locations, provide and install the called-out bridging member sizes.

2. Provide diagonal X-bridging where called for on the Drawings. 3. Provide diagonal X-bridging where bridging lines terminate at a steel beam, as

shown on the Drawings. F. Header Units: Provide header units, in accordance with SJI Specifications and the

Recommended Code of Standard Practice, to support tail joists at openings not framed with steel shapes.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and

accessories before application of shop paint. Clean steel in accordance with primer manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning” where not exposed to view. Clean steel designated architecturally exposed in accordance with SSPC-SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning".

B. Apply one shop coat of primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or

other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be

installed and notify the General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the



proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector.

3.2 ERECTION A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI Specifications, approved shop

drawings, and as herein specified. B. Placing Joists: 1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured.

Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening.

2. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction.

C. Bridging: Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before any construction loads

are applied. 3.3 FASTENING JOISTS A. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI Specifications,

unless a larger or longer weld is shown on the Drawings. 3.4 TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. Immediately after joist installation, paint all field bolt heads and nuts, and welded areas,

abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use the same type of paint as used for shop painting. Provide a continuous dry film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil.



STEEL DECK 05 31 0 - 1

SECTION 05 31 00

STEEL DECK


and defines workmanship, quality control procedures, and identifies governing codes and standards for fabrication, placement, accessories and final acceptance of steel floor and roof decking, and steel forms for concrete for this Project.


Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Division 1: General Requirements Section 032520: Anchors and Inserts Section 051000: Structural Steel Section 052100: Steel Joists Section 055000: Metal Fabrications 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the latest edition of the following


1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 3. SDI "Manual of Construction with Steel Deck." 4. SDI "Diaphragm Design Manual - 2nd Edition." B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in

accordance with AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Install and fasten deck units to resist the net uplift loads scheduled in the Drawings.

Furthermore, roof deck installation shall be designed to provide a minimum of 340 lbs.



per ft. diaphragm shear capacity. See Drawings for any areas that must be designed for higher diaphragm shear capacity.

B. Sound Attenuation: The Noise Reduction Coefficient of the completed assembly shall

not be less than 0.65 as determined by tests in accordance with ASTM C 423. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation

instructions for each type of decking and accessories. Include manufacturer's certification as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. This submission is for record only, and may not be returned.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout and type of deck panels,

anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing or other accessories. Submit in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel for Deck Units: 1. Non-composite Floor Deck: ASTM A 653SS. 2. Roof Deck: ASTM A 653, Structural Quality grade 33 or higher. B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36. C. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 653, Structural Quality or higher. D. Galvanizing: Conform to ASTM A 924 with a minimum coating class of G 90 as defined

by ASTM A 653. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized

surfaces complying with Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 and ASTM A 780. F. Prime Paint: All acoustical deck shall receive manufacturer's standard white primer

compatible with galvanized base. Manufacturer's standard factory primer is to be compatible with galvanized base.

G. Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic

rubber. H. Acoustical Roof Deck Units: 1. Provide perforations on vertical webs of standard roof deck units and provide

Noise Reduction Coefficient of 0.65 or better.



2. Furnish manufacturer's standard inorganic, mineral fiber acoustical insulation strips of profile to fit void space.

I. Sound Absorbing Elements: 1. Fluted Deck Units: Sound-absorbing elements furnished to and installed by the

Roofer shall be composed of inert, fine, fibrous glass conforming to Federal Specifications HH-I-521C, Type I, Class A, MIL-I-22023C and HH-I-558A, Form A, Class I.

2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports, with flush, telescoped

or nested 2" laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide deck configuration, gauge and depth as shown on Drawings for all floor and roof

decking. Provide gauge and depth as shown on Drawings for all steel form deck for concrete.

C. Metal Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates of not less than 18-gage sheet steel for

end-abutting deck units. Form to match contour of deck units and with a width of approximately 6 inches. Use metal cover plates of sufficient width at side joints where the deck units change direction and other types of side laps are not possible. Supply cover plates of sufficient gage for proper stiffness.

D. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips of not less than 18-gage sheet steel

for openings between deck and columns or other construction, or where a change occurs in the direction of the span. Form to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of flutes and sides of deck.

E. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from single piece of galvanized sheet steel of the same

quality as the deck steel and shall be not less than 14 gauge before galvanizing. 1. Pans shall have an overall dimension of not less than 29 by 33 inches and must be

of an adequate size to receive roof drains. 2. Pans shall have a recessed surface of not less than 11/2" to receive roof sump,

unless otherwise shown on the project drawings, or required by the deck configuration.

3. Bearing flanges for steel deck shall be not less than 3 inches wide. 4. Pans shall be formed to provide a flat (level) sump surface in relationship to the

roof slope. 5. Holes for roof drains will be cut in the field. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION



A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which steel deck is to be installed and notify the General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Place deck units on supporting framework and adjust to final position with ends

accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.

C. Place deck units in straight alignment perpendicular to the supporting framework for their

entire length of run of flutes and with close alignment between flutes at ends of abutting units, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive

deflection. E. Coordinate and cooperate with Structural Steel Erector in locating deck bundles to

prevent overloading of structural members. F. Do not use deck units which are bent, crimped, buckled, creased, or damaged in any

way which will reduce their strength or which damage will be visible in finished work. Promptly remove damaged deck units from the site.

3.2 FASTENING DECK UNITS A. Comply with AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel", requirements and

procedures for manual metal-arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work.

B. Fasten deck units to steel supporting members with not less than 3/4" diameter fusion welds, or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 6" o.c. at end laps and no more than 12" o.c. at intermediate supports, and at closer spacing where required for lateral force resistance.

C. Tack weld or use machine screws at 4'-0" o.c. for fastening end closures. D. Use welding washers where recommended by the deck manufacturer. E. Mechanically fasten laps of adjacent deck units between supports with No. 10 self-

tapping screws at intervals not exceeding 24" o.c. F. With use of powder actuated fasteners, select size of pin according to manufacturers'

recommendations. G. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work

projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown on the Drawings. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT AT OPENINGS



A. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, deck continuity and support of other work as shown on the Drawings.

B. Reinforce decking around openings 6" to 12" in size with flat galvanized steel sheet

placed over the opening edge and fusion welded to the deck. Provide 18-gage steel sheet of same quality as deck units at least 12" wider and longer than opening. Space welds at each corner and not more than 12" o.c. along each side.

C. Where deck openings are from 15" to 30" wide, and are not supported by structural

members, weld a 1" x 1" x 1/4" steel angle to the underside of deck at right angles to deck ribs. Extend angle 3 ribs beyond each side of opening and weld to bottom surface of each rib. Reinforce each side of opening parallel to deck ribs with a 12" wide, 20-gage steel sheet placed on top surface of decking, welded at each corner and at 12" o.c. along each side. Deck reinforcing may be omitted when a roof sump pan is to be installed over the opening.

D. Hanger Slots or Clips: Provide UL approved punched hanger slots between adjacent

deck units where units are to receive hangers for support of lighting or other fixtures. Hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of deck units may be used instead of hanger slots.

E. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of

deck units. Weld as required. 3.4 ROOF SUMP PANS A. Place roof sump pans over openings provided in the roof deck and weld to top of deck

surface. Space welds not more than 12" o.c. with at least one weld in each corner. Cut opening in roof sump bottom to accommodate drain size indicated.

3.5 CLOSURE STRIPS A. Provide metal closure strips at all open uncovered ends and edges of roof deck, and in

the voids between deck and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete deck installation.

3.6 SOUND ABSORBING ELEMENTS A. Provide sound absorbing elements to the General Contractor. The time of installation is

to be coordinated by the General Contractor and is to be such that the elements will not be damaged by the weather.

3.7 TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. After deck installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots

on the top and bottom surfaces of deck units and supporting members.



B. Touch up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Touch up shop primer with same primer paint to blend into adjacent surfaces. 3.8 FINISH PAINTING A. Refer to Division 9 for field paint requirements.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 1

SECTION 054000

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Product Test Reports

D. Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

D. and as follows:

E. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings."


A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 2. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO). 3. Clark Western Building Systems, Inc. 4. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 5. Craco Manufacturing, Inc. 6. Custom Stud, Inc. 7. Design Shapes in Steel. 8. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 9. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 10. Marino/WARE. 11. MBA Building Supplies, Inc. 12. Olmar Supply, Inc. 13. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 14. SCAFCO Corporation. 15. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 16. State Building Products, Inc.



17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steel Structural Systems. 19. Steeler, Inc. 20. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 21. Telling Industries, LLC. 22. The Steel Network, Inc. 23. United Metal Products, Inc. 24. United Steel Manufacturing


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without

deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the

wall height.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch.

5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:

1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H (ST230H). 2. Coating: G60 (Z180).

C. Steel Sheet for Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 33 (230), Class 1 or 2. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180).

2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-3/8 inches (35 mm).

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips.



6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

A. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

B. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated in accordance with ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.



E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.



F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches O.C.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building

structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to [bypassing] [infill] studs and anchor to

building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.



1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

a. Install solid blocking at 96-inch (2440-mm) centers.

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 1

SECTION 06 10 53

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels.


1. Section 05 10 53 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with



requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

3. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives and plywood, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.




A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Certified Wood: Lumber and plywood shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade

stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20

for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Retain subparagraph below for exposed framing if considered necessary.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.



C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat tems indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above

for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841Retain option in first paragraph below if required for plywood backing panels.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.



F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof framing and blocking. 3. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 lumber and any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.

1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."



2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.



C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to existing masonry walls; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.

J. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and

Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

K. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.



3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1

SECTION 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.


1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" 2. 07 55 00 “3-Ply Membrane Roofing”




A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.




A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver board materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Foil Faced Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products. e. Johns Manville.

2. Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa).

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

C. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content. Refer to Section 01 81 13 – “Sustainable Design Requirements” for additional Project requirements. 1. Nominal density of not less than 1.6 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m) or more than 1.7

lb/cu. ft. (27 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x m/W at 24 deg C).

D. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber board insulation as follows:

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.



2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning.

B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content. Refer to Section 01 81 13 – “Sustainable Design Requirements” for additional Project requirements.

C. Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.

D. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.

2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place.


a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Gemco; Spindle Type.

2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers.

2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- (0.762-mm-) thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches (50 mm) square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter.


a. AGM Industries, Inc.; style as recommended by manufacturer. b. Gemco; style as recommended by manufacturer

D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.


a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.



D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm] in from exterior walls.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 1

SECTION 073113

ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the shingle roofing as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.


A. Section 03 51 00 “Cementitious Roof Deck”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified, including details of construction rela-tive to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and colors.

B. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's sample finishes show-ing full range of colors and profiles available.


A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products that are identical to those tested for the specified fire performance characteristics by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. identify products with ap-propriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory".

B. FM Listing: System shall comply with FM 1-90 for wind uplift resistance.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with la-bels intact.

B. Handle and store materials at site to prevent water damage, staining, or other physical damage. Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job site storage, handling and protection.




A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be installed in compliance with manufacturer's recom-mendations and when substrate is completely dry.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer and installer agreeing to repair or replace shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deforma-tion or deterioration of shingles beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Con-tractor under the Contract Documents.

1. Warranty period is 50 years after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Include all elements of roof (i.e. ridge vent) in 50 year warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, “Timberline 50" asphalt shin-gles made by GAF or equal by one of the following:

1. Owens Corning.

2. Certainteed Corp.

3. Tamko

4. Celotex Corp.

5. Or equal.

B. Shingles, UL Class "A" Heavy Weight: Mineral-surfaced, self sealing, three-tab asphalt fiberglass strip shingles complying with ASTM D 3018, Type 1 ASTM D3161 Type I and ASTM D3462. Provide shingles bearing UL Class "A" external fire exposure label and UL "Wind Resistant" label.

C. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard factory precut units to match shin-gles.

D. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for asphalt shingles of type specified.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Plastic Cement: Non-asbestos fibrated asphalt cement complying with ASTM D 4586, designed for trowel application.

B. Shingling Nails: Aluminum or hot dip galvanized steel, 10 or 12 gage, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks, minimum 3/8" diameter



head, and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4" into solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing. Material of nails in contact with flashing shall match mate-rials selected for flashing to prevent galvanic action.

C. Metal Drip Edge: .032” thick aluminum with Kynar finish, brake-formed to provide 3" roof deck flange and 1-1/2" fascia flange with 3/8" drip at lower edge. Furnish in lengths of 8 or 10 feet. Color as selected by Architect.

D. Metal Flashing: .032” thick aluminum with clear anodized finish, job-cut to sizes and configurations required.

E. Open Valley Metal Flashing: Preformed, inverted “V” profile at center of valley and ex-tending at least 9” in each direction from center line of valley. Flashing shall be .032” thick aluminum with Kynar finish. Color as selected by Architect.

F. Ridge and Eave Vent: "V-600 and V-600T” made by Cor-A-Vent, Air Vent, Inc. GAF Cobra or equal; color as selected by the Architect.

G. Waterproof Underlayment (as indicated on the Drawings): Minimum 40 mil thick, self adhering, polymer modified bituminous sheet membrane, complying with ASTM D1970. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. W.R. Grace b. Siplast c. GAF d. Or Equal.

H. Roofing Felt: 30 lb. Asphalt saturated felt conforming to ASTM D226.

I. Insulation/Roof Sheathing: Nail base insulation with closed cell polyiso, bonded to 7/16” APA rated OSB, constructed with standard 1/2” or 3/4” ventilation spacing be-tween the insulation and OSB to dissipate moisture vapor and heat build-up, “Vented R” manufactured by Atlas Roofing Corp., Apache, Cornell or equal. Material shall comply with ASTM C1289, Type V, and UL Standard 1256 and 790 classification.

J. Sheathing Fasteners: Use FM approved corrosion resistant insulation mechanical fas-teners of appropriate diameter and length as recommended by the manufacturer and to comply with FM 90.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions where shingle roofing is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the Con-tractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knot holes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with non-corrosive roofing nails.

B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper se-quencing. Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against move-ment.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, but not less than recommended by "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual”.

B. Comply with Factory Mutual requirements for wind uplift resistance.

C. Install sheathing/roof board in accordance with ASCE-7 and manufacturer’s require-ments.

D. Waterproof Underlayment: Apply one ply of underlayment horizontally over entire sur-face to receive shingles, lapping courses a minimum of 2", end laps a minimum of 4", and hips a minimum of 6".

E. Metal Open Valleys: Comply with ARMA, NRCA, and SMACMA recommendations.

F. Install shingles beginning at lower end with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted shingles with tabs removed. Fasten shingles in pattern, with weather exposure, and using number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines or premarked underlayment to ensure straight coursing.

1. Cut and fit shingles at ridges and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. Fasteners at ridges shall be of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified.

2. Set shingle pattern as recommended by shingle manufacturer for shingle selected.

G. Flashing: Install metal flashing in accordance with details and recommendations of the "Asphalt Roofing" section of "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual

H. Ridge Vents: Install ridge vents according to manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Replace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials meet-ing specified requirements.



3-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 55 00 - 1

SECTION 07 55 00

3 – PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. Hot-applied built-up roofing over prepared substrate, this includes both new and existing work.

B. For a new roofing system over existing work, the following is to be performed:

1. Remove all existing roofing felts and or membrane, roofing insulation,

flashing, copings, wood nailers and any other all appurtances down to the existing bare metal roofing deck.

2. should any of the substrate not be suitable for the installation of the new roofing the Architect and the Owner shall be notified immediately. Upon careful review a field change order can be set forth as needed.

3. Replace all wood nailers, pipe flashing, gas line supports, damaged roof or skylight curbs, and any and all penetrations or appurtances to make the new roofing system complete, watertite, and secure.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 06 10 53 “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” 2. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. ASCE 7-98, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D41 Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,

Dampproofing and Waterproofing. 2. ASTM D312 Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. 3. ASTM D451 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Granular Mineral Surfacing

for Asphalt Roofing Products. 4. ASTM D1079 Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing and

Bituminous Materials. 5. ASTM D1227 Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective



Coating for Roofing. 6. ASTM D1863 Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used as a Protective

Coating for Roofing. 7. ASTM D2178 Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used as a Protective

Coating for Roofing. 8. ASTM D2822 Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement. 9. ASTM D2824 Specification for Aluminum-Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coating. 10. ASTM D4601 Specification for Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet

Used in Roofing. 11. ASTM D5147 Test Method for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials.

12. ASTM D6162 Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements.

13. ASTM D6163 Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements.

14. ASTM E108 Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings.

C. Factory Mutual Research (FM)

1. Roof Assembly Classifications.

D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. Fire Hazard Classifications.

F. Warnock Hersey (WH)

1. Fire Hazard Classifications.

1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

B. Samples: Submit two samples of the following:

1. 1 lb. sample of roofing aggregate for review.

C. Specimen Warranty: Provide an unexecuted copy of the warranty specified for this Project, identifying the terms and conditions required of the Manufacturer and the Owner.

1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and recommendations indicating special precautions required for installing the



membrane. B. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that roof system furnished is approved by Factory

Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, Warnock Hersey or approved third party testing facility in accordance with ASTM E108, Class A for external fire and meets local or nationally recognized building codes.

C. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that the roof system is adhered properly to meet or

exceed the requirements of FM I-90. D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that the roof system furnished is accepted by

Factory Mutual Approval Standard 4470. E. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that materials are manufactured in the United

States and conform to requirements specified herein, are chemically and physically compatible with each other, and are suitable for inclusion within the total roof system specified herein.

F. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Submit a certified copy of the roofing manufacturer’s ISO

9001 compliance certificate. G. Test Reports: Submit test reports, prepared by an independent testing agency, for all

modified bituminous sheet roofing, indicating compliance with ASTM D5147. H. Written certification from the roofing system manufacturer certifying the applicator is

currently authorized for the installation of the specified roof system. I. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations

according to ASCE 7-02, Method 2 for Components and Cladding, sealed by a registered professional engineer employed by the system manufacturer as a full-time staff engineer. In no case shall the design loads be taken to be less than those detailed in Design and Performance Criteria article.

J. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations

according to ASCE 7-02, Method 2 for Components and Cladding, sealed by a registered professional engineer employed by the system manufacturer as a full-time staff engineer. In no case shall the design loads be taken to be less than those detailed in Design and Performance Criteria article of this specification.

K. Qualification data for firms and individuals identified in Quality Assurance Article

below.

1.06 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with Requirements of Division 01 Section – Closeout Submittals. B. Special Project Warranty: Provide specified warranty for the Project, executed by the

authorized agent of the Manufacturer. C. Roofing Maintenance Instructions. Provide a manual of manufacturer’s

recommendations for maintenance of installed roofing systems. D. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation

acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended



coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. E. Demonstration and Training Schedule: Provide a schedule of proposed dates and

times for instruction of Owner’s personnel in the maintenance requirements for completed roofing work. Refer to Part 3 for additional requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with not less than [20] years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in modified bituminous roofing installation with not less than [10] years experience and authorized by roofing system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer’s roofing materials.

C. Installer’s Field Supervision: Maintain a full-time Supervisor/Foreman on job site

during all phases of roofing work while roofing work is in progress. Maintain proper supervision of workmen.

1. Maintain a copy of the Contract Documents in the possession of the

Supervisor/Foreman and on the roof at all times. D. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer.

Secondary products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the roofing system Manufacturer. 1. Upon request of the Architect or Owner, submit Manufacturer’s written

approval of secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the Manufacturer.

E. Source Quality Control: Manufacturer shall have in place a documented,

standardized quality control program such as ISO-9001 approval. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Pre-Installation Roofing Conference: Convene a pre-roofing conference approximately two (2) weeks before scheduled commencement of removal (demolition) of the existing roof, and the reinstallation of the modified bituminous roofing system installation and associated work.

B. Require attendance of installer of each component of associated work, installers of

deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing which must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any), Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer’s representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including (where applicable) Owner’s insurers, testing agencies and governing authorities. Objectives of conference include:

1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work,

including set up and mobilization areas for stored material and work area. 2. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss

condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by others.

3. Review structural loading limitations of deck and inspect deck for loss of



flatness and for required attachment. 4. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications and other

contract documents). 5. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed.

6. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify

availability of materials, installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

7. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures.

8. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing (if not mandatory requirement).

9. Record discussion of conference including decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference.

10. Review notification procedures for weather or non-working days.

C. The Owner’s Representative will designate one of the conference participants to record the proceedings and promptly distribute them to the participants for record.

D. The intent of the conference is to resolve issues affecting the installation and

performance of roofing work. Do not proceed with roofing work until such issues are resolved the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect. This shall not be construed as interference with the progress of Work on the part of the Owner or Architect.


A. Deliver products to site with seals and labels intact, in manufacturer’s original containers, dry and undamaged.

B. Store and handle roofing sheets in a dry, well-ventilated, weather-tight place to prevent moisture exposure. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on pallets or other raised surface. Stand all roll materials on end. Cover roll goods with a canvas tarpaulin or other breathable material (not polyethylene).

C. Do not leave unused materials on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in

progress unless protected from weather and other moisture sources. D. Secure all material and equipment on the job site. If any material or equipment is

stored on the roof, to assure that the integrity of the deck is not compromised at any time. Damage to the deck caused by the Contractor’s actions will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and will be repaired or replaced at his expense.

1.10 MANUFACTURER’S INSPECTIONS

A. When the project is in progress, the roofing system manufacturer will provide the following:

1. Report progress and quality of the work as observed. 2. Provide periodic job site inspections, and photographs on a daily basis until

all roofing is completed 3. Report to the Architect in writing any failure or refusal of the Contractor to



correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor’s attention. 4. Confirm after completion that manufacturer has observed no applications

procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported and corrected.

5. Provide the Engineer of Record for this roofing project with a written statement that they will provide a site inspection every <1> days that confirms that the project is being constructed as specified, by an experienced, full time employee of the company.


A. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will

permit unit of work to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements.

B. Do not apply roofing insulation or membrane to damp deck surface. C. Do not expose materials subject to water or solar damage in quantities greater than

can be weatherproofed during same day. D. All slopes of greater than 1-1/2:12 require back-nailing to prevent slippage of the ply

sheets. Use ring or spiral-shank one (1) inch cap nails, or screws and plates at a rate of one (1) fastener per ply (including the modified membrane) at each insulation stop. Place insulation stops at 16 ft o.c. for slopes less than 3:12 and four (4) ft o.c. for slopes greater than 3:12. On non-insulated systems, nail each ply directly into the deck at the rate specified above. When slope exceeds 1 ½:12, install all plies parallel to the slope (strapping) to facilitate backnailing. Install four (4) additional fasteners at the upper edge of the modified bitumen sheet when strapping the plies.

1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence installation of roofing with related units of work specified in other sections to ensure that roof assemblies including roof accessories, flashing, trim and joint sealers are protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion and adjacent construction activity.

B. Complete all roofing field assembly work each day. Phased construction will not be

accepted. 1.13 WARRANTY

A. Upon completion of installation, and acceptance by the Owner, the manufacturer will supply to the Owner with a 30 year warranty.

B. Installer will submit a two (2)-year warranty to the membrane manufacturer. C. Membrane manufacturer will provide periodic inspections for the life of the warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. The design is based upon roofing systems engineered and manufactured by The Garland Company or approved equals:



The Garland Company. 3800 East 91st Street Cleveland, Ohio 44105 Telephone: (800) 762-8225 Website: www.garlandco.com

B. Insulation: A closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core bonded on each side in

the foaming process to fiber reinforced facers. Material herein specified shall be manufactured and furnished by Johns Mansville-ENRGY.2, Roofing Systems Group, P.O. Box 5108, Denver, Colorado, 80217, 303-978-2000.

C. Recovery board shall a high density 6 sided asphalt saturated wood

fiberboard, manufactured by Temple-Inland, Diboll, Texas 75941, (800) 231-6060.

D. Pillow blocks herein specified shall be manufactured and furnished by Pillow

Block Pipestand, Suite 315, 1225 East Fort Union Boulevard, Midvale, Utah 84047, (801) 566-3680.

2.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Modified bituminous roofing work including but not limited to:

1. Two plies of approved ASTM D-2178 HPR glass fiber roofing felt bonded to the prepared substrate with hot bitumen.

2. The hot bitumen will consist of ASTM D-312 Type III steep No Smell asphalt by Continental Materials.

Softening Point 185°F - 205°F Flash Point 500°F Penetration @ 77°F 15-35 units Ductility @ 77°F 2.5 cm 3. All flashings will be set in bitumen and will be one HPR Tribase base

flashing ply covered by an additional layer of modified bitumen membrane. 4. The modified membrane will be: Stressply E

80 mil SBS and SIS and ES (Stryrene-Butadiene-Styrene and Styrene-Isoprene-Styrene, Ethylene-Styrene) rubber modified membrane incorporating post consumer recycled rubber and reinforced with a super strong fiberglass and polyester composite scrim

Tensile Strength (ASTM D-5147) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 500 lbf/in CMD 750 lbf/in (50 mm/min. @ 23 � 3°C) MD 87.5 kN/m CMD 96.25 kNm Tear Strength (ASTM D-5147) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 900 lbf CMD 950 lbf 50 mm/min. @ 23 � 3°C MD 4003 N CMD 4226 N



Elongation at Maximum Tensile (ASTM D-5147) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 6% CMD 6% 50 mm/min. @ 23 � 3°C Low Temperature Flexibility (ASTM D-5147): Passes -30°F 2.03 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Primer: V.O.C. compliant, ASTM D-41. B. Asphalt Roofing Mastic: V.O.C. compliant, ASTM D-2822, Type II.

C. Interply Adhesive: Meet ASTM Specifications D-312 Type III No Smell Asphalt.

2.04 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Felt Plies

1. Fiberglass Felts: ASTM D-2178, HPR Glasfelts

Two Plies of HPR Glasfelt Properties: Base Tensile Strength (ASTM D-2523) 2 in/min. @73.4 � 3.6°F MD 135 lbf/in CMD 120 lbf/in Tear Strength (ASTM D-4073) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 220 lbf CMD 220 lbf Elongation at Maximum Tensile (ASTM D-2523) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 4.0% CMD 4.0%

B. Modified Flashing Ply Modified Membrane

Properties: Flashing Underlayment

Tri-Base Plus Sheet: Double coated Polyester-Fiberglass-Polyester scrim with the following minimum performance requirements according to ASTM D5147.

Properties (Finished Membrane):

Tensile Strength (ASTM D2523) 2 in/min. @73.4 � 3.6°F MD 250 lbf/in CMD 250 lbf/in Tear Strength (ASTM D4073) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 370 lbf CMD 370 lbf Elongation at Maximum Tensile (ASTM D2523) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 6.0% CMD 6.0%

C. Modified Finished Flashing Membrane

Modified Membrane Properties: Finished Top Ply



Stressply E Mineral; ASTM D-6162, Type III Grade G 135 mil SBS and SIS and ES (Stryrene-Butadiene-Styrene and Styrene-

Isoprene-Styrene, Ethylene-Styrene) rubber modified membrane incorporating post consumer recycled rubber and reinforced with a super strong fiberglass and polyester composite scrim. Surfaced with the highly reflective white mineral.

Tensile Strength (ASTM D-5147) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 500 lbf/in CMD 550 lbf/in 50 mm/min. @ 23 � 3°C MD 87.5 kN/m CMD 96.25 kNm Tear Strength (ASTM D-5147) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 900 lbf CMD 950 lbf 50 mm/min. @ 23 � 3°C MD 4003 N CMD 4226 N Elongation at Maximum Tensile (ASTM D-5147) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 � 3.6°F MD 6.0% CMD 6.0% 50 mm/min. @ 23 � 3°C Low Temperature Flexibility (ASTM D-5147): Passes -30°F (-34°C)

D. Flood Coat Performance Requirements: Viscosity (cps) Brookfield Heliopath, 2.5 rpm 120,000 Color: Black Solids by weight 87% by volume 89% Weight per gallon 9.o lbs Flash Point ASTM D-93 105degrees F min

2.05 SURFACINGS

A. Aggregate: To conform to ASTM D-1863.

1. Slag 2. Pea Gravel 3. White Spar



2.06 RELATED MATERIALS A. Roof Insulation B. Roof Insulation Fasteners

C. Walkway Pads: As recommended and furnished by the membrane manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Remove all existing roofing material down to the deck and install a new roof as

outlined in this specification. Install new flashings, counter-flashings and pitch pans. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS

A. Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing the roof system.

B. Insurance/Code Compliance: Where required, install and test the roofing system to

comply with governing regulation and specified insurance requirements.

C. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the modified bituminous roofing system work.

D. Coordinate installing roofing system components so that insulation and roofing plies

are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed overnight. Provide cut-offs at end of each day’s work to cover exposed ply sheets and insulation with two (2) plies of #15 organic roofing felt set in full moppings of bitumen and with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. Night seals must be made to withstand the hash weather conditions if work was unable to commence the next day. Remove cut-offs immediately before resuming work.

E. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen according to EVT Method as

recommended by NRCA. Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid-holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (plus 5°F at point of application) more than 1 hour prior to time of application. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature, EVT, and fire-safe handling temperature of bitumen either by information from manufacturer or by suitable test. Do not exceed recommended temperature limits during bitumen heating. Do not heat to a temperature higher than 25° below flash point. Discard bitumen that has been held at temperature exceeding finishing blowing temperature (FBT) for more than 3 hours. Keep kettle lid closed except when adding bitumen.

F. Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping, apply bitumen at the rate of

approximately 25 lb. of bitumen per roof square. For a flood coat, apply bitumen at the rate of approximately 60-70 lb. of bitumen per square (plus or minus 25 percent on a total job average basis).

G. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Prevent bitumen from penetrating substrate joints,

entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building



construction.

H. Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions. Keep roofing materials dry before and during application. Do not permit phased construction. Complete application of roofing plies, modified sheet and flashing in a continuous operation. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day.

I. Cut-Offs: At end of each day’s roofing installation, protect exposed edge of

incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering of two (2) plies of #15 organic roofing felt set in full moppings of bitumen with joints and edges sealed. Cut-Offs must be made to withstand the hash weather conditions if work was unable to commence the next day.

J. Phase roofing is not acceptable. Any insulation or base layers laid in any one day

must be covered with the properly installed roof system that same day. Failure to do so will void any warranties and no guarantee will be issued for the roofing system.

3.03 ROOF PREPARATION

A. Do not remove existing roofing system or damaged decking when weather conditions threaten the integrity of the building contents or intended continued occupancy. Maintain continued temporary protection prior to installation of the new roofing system.

B. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to respond immediately to correction of roof leakage during construction. A four (4) hour time limit shall be given from the time of notification of emergency conditions. In the event of water penetration during rain or a storm, the Contractor shall provide for repair or protection of the building contents and interior. If the Contractor does not respond or cannot be contacted, the Owner will effect repairs or emergency action and the Contractor shall be back charged for all expenses and damages, if any. The contractor must notify the Eaton representative the day prior of the following day work area. This must be done on a daily bases.

C. Remove all membrane, cant strips, rigid insulation, expansion joints, base flashings,

and any other items shown on the drawings. In addition, complete removal of all nails and other debris is required to leave a smooth, even surface for re-roofing.

D. Extreme care must be exercised to ensure that no residue, resulting from the cleaning procedures or material application is permitted to enter the building; ventilators, air intake units, and any potential entry shall be covered.

1. Particular care should be afforded roof drains to ensure against blockage.

E. Tear off down to the deck. Care should be taken not to damage deck with power cutters, axes or other tools. Remove all existing roofing materials down to the deck in all areas designated to be re-roofed.

F. Under certain conditions, it will be necessary and desirable to incorporate one or

more of the following methods for removal of dirt, silt, gravel, debris, roof membrane



and insulation from the roof surface in order to preserve the ecology, eliminate unsightly conditions, and protect the building surfaces:

1. Roof vacuum systems. 2. Crane and hopper with dump truck system. 3. Enclosed chutes with protective shrouds on the building and ground

surfaces. H. All debris dumped from the roof shall be transported from the roof via chutes into

dumpsters or trucks and this debris shall be removed from the premises when vehicles are full at the Contractors cost. No debris shall be transported from the area being worked on over a previously finished roof without an underlayment of ¾” plywood.

I. All roofing equipment not in use or left filled will be parked on the column lines on ¾

plywood. J. Building and/or ground damage caused by the removal or installation of the roof

system will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. K. All debris must be removed from the facilities and disposed of at an approved landfill.

The contractor will identify the landfill he intends to use for disposal. L. No more roof shall be torn off on any one day than can be completely covered

with the complete roofing assemble and completely sealed against the

elements. The night seal most be made so as to withstand work stoppage for any given time

3.04 DECK PREPERATION

A. Metal deck that is deteriorated to the point where replacement is required, the

owners representative will determine the extent of replacement due to deterioration. Contractor shall replace the deck with like and kind. The repaired or replaced deck must be installed to meet manufactures requirements.

B. Any concrete Pads are to be primed with Garla Prime at the rate of .75 sq. ft./gal.

3.05 ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

A. Remove roof penetrations and equipment as designated by the owners

representative. Capped curbs, stacks, equipment, etc. to be removed, will be marked with an "X".

B. Openings left after removal, smaller than 12 inches square can be covered by mechanically fastening a 1/8 inch thick steel plate into the deck. Plate must be a minimum of 6 inches larger than the opening on all dimensions. Openings up to 24 inches square can be covered by a 3/16 inch plate. Consult owners representative for larger openings.

C. Any existing exhaust fans which are mounted low to the existing roof line will have to be raised. Remove the fan assembly and build up the curb with treated lumber such that the new curb is a minimum of 8 inches



above the new roof line. 3.06 INSULATION

A Deliver products to the job site must be with seals and labels intact, in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged.

B. Store all insulation materials in a manner to protect them from the wind, sun and

moisture damage prior to and during installation. Any insulation that has been exposed to any moisture shall be removed from the project site.

C. Keep materials enclosed in a watertight, ventilated enclosure (i.e. tarpaulins).

D. Store materials off the ground. Any warped, broken or wet insulation boards shall be removed from the site.

E. Insulation requirements must meet State and City codes. It is the contractor’s responsibility to comply with the codes.

F. Install the first layer of approximitely 1.5" isocyanurate insulation board is

to be installed by the use of approved Mechanical Fasteners The second layer of 1/2" high density 6 sided asphalt saturated fiberboard is to be the use solidly mopped in with hot asphalt with a fume recovery system and specially blended asphalt. All joints must be staggered

G. Install new cants at curbs, expansion joints and walls are to be set in asphalt or mastic and can be either wood fiber or fiberglass

H. Roof must have positive drainage unless impractical or unable. Saddles are to be installed between drains

3.07 FELT PLY INSTALLATION A. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations

and instructions.

B. Fiberglass Plies Type IV: Install [two) (2)] fiberglass felts in twenty five (25) lb. per sq. of bitumen shingled uniformly to achieve [three (3)] plies over the entire prepared substrate. Shingle in direction of slope to shed water on each area of roof. Apply a flood coat of bitumen over top ply.

C. Lap ply sheet ends eight (8) inches. Stagger end laps twelve (12) inches minimum. D. Lightly broom in fiberglass plies to assure complete adhesion. E. Extend plies two (2) inches beyond top edges of cants at wall and roof projections

and equipment bases. F. Install base flashing ply to all perimeter and projection details.

3.08 HPR MODIFIED MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. The modified membrane shall then by solidly bonded to the base layers with specified asphalt at the rate of 25 to 30 lbs. per 100 square feet.



B. The roll must push a puddle of asphalt in front of it with asphalt slightly visible at all side laps. Care should be taken to eliminate air entrapment under the membrane.

C. Apply pressure to all seams to ensure that the laps are solidly bonded to substrate.

D. Subsequent rolls of modified shall be installed across the roof as above with a Minimum of 4” side laps and 8” end laps. The end laps shall be staggered. The modified membrane shall be laid in the same direction as the under layers but the laps shall not coincide with the laps of the base layers. Apply asphalt no more than five feet ahead of each roll being embedded. E Extend membrane 2” beyond top edge of all cants in full moppings of the Specified asphalt.

3.09 FLASHING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

Details showing installation of curb, wall flashings, drain seals, etc. are shown on Detailed Drawings. All pressure bars are to be made out of flat stock to be and stripped in with 6” mesh and mastic. All pressure bars are to be nailed on 6" centers. Metal surfaced mounted counter flashing is to be installed. All flashing are to be Stressply Mineral. All metal edge, metal expansion covers & coping caps details must have a splice plate. Slip metal flashings are to be installed where counter flashings are not practical. All metal corners and details must be per SMACNA details if not shown on detail drawings.

A. Seal all curb, wall and parapet flashings with an application of mastic and mesh on a

daily basis. Do not permit conditions to exist that will allow moisture to enter behind, around or under the roof or flashing membrane.

B. Prepare all walls, penetrations, expansion joints [and where shown on the drawings]

to be flashed with asphalt primer at the rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon. Allow primer to dry tack free.

C. Use the modified membrane as the flashing membrane. Adhere to the underlying

base flashing ply with specified asphalt unless otherwise noted in these specifications. Nail off at a minimum of eight (8) inches o.c. from the finished roof at all vertical surfaces.

D. Solidly adhere the entire sheet of flashing membrane to the substrate. E. Seal all vertical laps of flashing membrane with a three-course application of

trowel-grade mastic and fiberglass mesh. F. Coordinate counter flashing, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work with

roofing work. G. Coordinate roof accessories, miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including

piping vents and other devices with the roofing system work.



3.10 CLEANING

A. Remove bitumen adhesive drippings from all walls, windows, floors, ladders and finished surfaces.

B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other sources of soiling

caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning instructions and conform to their instructions.

C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.

3.11 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Remove and properly dispose of waste products generated during roofing procedures. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

3.12 FINAL INSPECTION

A. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect, installer, installer of associated work, Owner, roofing system manufacturer’s representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system.

B. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as

flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance.

C. The roofing system manufacturer reserves the right to request a thermographic scan

of the roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials have been installed. The thermographic scan shall be provided by the Contractor.

D. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Contractor shall be

required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense. E. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as

required to a produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

F. Notify the Architect upon completion of corrections. G. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation

from the roofing system manufacturer.

H. Immediately correct roof leakage during construction. If the Contractor does not respond within twenty four (24) hours, the Owner will exercise rights to correct the Work under the terms of the Conditions of the Contract.

3.13 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. At a time and date agreed to by the Owner, instruct the Owner’s facility manager, or other representative designated by the Owner, on the following procedures:



1. Roof troubleshooting procedures. 2. Notification procedures for reporting leaks or other apparent roofing

problems. 3. Roofing maintenance. 4. The Owner’s obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and

force. 5. The Manufacturer’s obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect

and force.



Issued For Bidding

ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00 - 1

SECTION 07 71 00

ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copings. 2. Roof-edge flashings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 55 00 “3-Ply Membrane Roofing”


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work. Include the following:


Issued For Bidding


1. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction.

2. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 4. Details of special conditions.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For copings and roof-edge flashings lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for copings and roof-edge flashings.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


Issued For Bidding


2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, finished as follows:

1. Exposed High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

2.2 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20

deg F (29 deg C). 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

C. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.

D. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.


Issued For Bidding



A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric [polyurethane] [silicone] polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 COPINGS

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

a. Architectural Products Company. b. ATAS International, Inc. c. Castle Metal Products. d. Cheney Flashing Company. e. Hickman Company, W. P. f. Johns Manville. g. Merchant & Evans, Inc. h. Metal-Era, Inc. i. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. j. MM Systems Corporation. k. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc. l. Perimeter Systems; a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Company,

Inc.


Issued For Bidding


3. Coping-Cap Material: Formed aluminum, 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 5. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Face leg hooked to continuous cleat with back

leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material. 6. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches

(300 mm) wide, with integral cleats. 7. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.

B. Gutters & Downspouts: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch (25 mm) above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.

1. Fabricate from the following exposed metal: a. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch.

2. .028-inch (0.71-mm)] [0.034-inch (0.86-mm)] <Insert thickness> thickness.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


Issued For Bidding


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water. Overlap edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

C. Polyethylene Sheet: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

D. Slip Sheet: Install with tape or adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of [ncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of [felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet] [self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment] [or] [polyethylene sheet].

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.


Issued For Bidding


1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws

E. Seal joints as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

3.4 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements.

1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements.

2. Interlock face leg drip edge into continuous cleat anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements. Anchor back leg of coping with screw fasteners and elastomeric washers at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements.

3.5 ROOF-EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.


Issued For Bidding


3.6 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system.

B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 41 13 - 1

SECTION 08 41 13

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Architectural Aluminum Storefront Systems, including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of storefront units.

1. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Storefront Systems include: a. Trifab® VG 451T Storefront System – 2" x 4-1/2" (50.8 mm x 114.3 mm)

nominal dimension; Thermal; Front Glazed; Screw Spline, Shear Block, or Stick.


1. Division 079200 “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants installed as part of the aluminum storefront system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions: For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural Manufactures Association (AAMA) – AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG).


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Basic Wind Speed: 90mph



b. Importance Factor: Iw = 1.0 c. Exposure Category: B

B. Storefront System Performance Requirements:

1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures based on the Ohio Building Code.

2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/s · m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa).

3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf (383 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501.

4. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf (958 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur.

5. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: a. Glass to Exterior – 0.47 (low-e) BTU/hr/ft2/°F. b. Glass to Center – 0.44 (low-e) BTU/hr/ft2/°F. c. Glass to Interior – 0.41 BTU/hr/ft2/°F

6. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: a. Glass to Exterior – 70frame and 69glass (low-e). b. Glass to Center – 62 frame and 68glass (low-e). c. Glass to Interior – 56 frame and 67 glass (low-e).

7. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 1886 and information in ASTM E 1996 and /or AAMA 506. a. Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. b. Small-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located more than

30 feet (9.1 m) above grade.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum frame storefront system indicated.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum framed storefront system and components required.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type of aluminum-framed storefront.

F. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12” (300 mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of providing aluminum framed storefront system that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test reports, and calculations.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum framed storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum framed storefront system and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."




A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of aluminum framed storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufactures Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the

project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: 1. Kawneer Company Inc. 2. Trifab® 451T (thermal) Storefront System 3. 2” x 4-1/2” (50.8 mm x 114.3 mm) System Dimensions 4. Glass: Center glazed

B. Substitutions: Refer to Substitutions Section for procedures and submission requirements 1. Pre-Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests ten (10)

days prior to bid date. 2. Post-Contract (Construction Period) Substitutions: Submit written request in

order to avoid storefront installation and construction delays. 3. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings

modified to suit specific project requirements and job conditions. 4. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting

to adherence to specification requirements for storefront system performance criteria, and (2) has been engaged in the design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum storefronts for a period of not less than ten (10) years. (Company Name)

5. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement required by the project.

6. Samples: Provide samples of typical product sections and finish samples in manufacturer's standard sizes.

C. Substitution Acceptance: Acceptance will be in written form, either as an addendum or modification, and documented by a formal change order signed by the Owner and Contractor.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070” wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and temper.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components.

C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement.

F. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data.

2.3 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Thermal Barrier (Trifab® VG 451T): 1. Kawneer IsoLock® Thermal Break with a 1/4" (6.4 mm) separation consisting of a

two-part chemically curing, high-density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections. a. Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposes shall be stainless steel.

D. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action



E. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

F. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated. a. Color: Black

2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. a. Color: Matching structural sealant.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30 mil (0.762 mm) thickness per coat.



2.6 FABRICATION

A. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and

moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing

to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to

greatest extent possible.

B. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

C. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufactures standard installation instructions.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permanodic® AA-M12C22A31, AAMA 611, Architectural Class II Clear

Anodic Coating (Color #17 Clear) (Standard).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight framed aluminum storefront system installation.



1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris.

2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening.

3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum framed storefront system, accessories, and other components.

B. Install aluminum framed storefront system level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction.

D. Install aluminum framed storefront system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within sliding door to the exterior.

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.


A. Field Tests: Architect shall select storefront units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer's representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount.

1. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements. Testing Standard per AAMA 503, including reference to ASTM E 783 for Air Infiltration Test and ASTM E 1105 Water Infiltration Test. a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783.

Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, whichever is greater.

b. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 6.24 psf (300 Pa).



B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by manufacturer’s field service representative.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.



GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Glazed storefront framing.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2

1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Glass Type Factors for Wired, Patterned, and Sandblasted Glass:

a. Short-Duration Glass Type Factor for Wired Glass: 0.5. b. Long-Duration Glass Type Factor for Wired Glass: 0.3. c. Short-Duration Glass Type Factor for Patterned Glass: 1.0. d. Long-Duration Glass Type Factor for Patterned Glass: 0.6. e. Short-Duration Glass Type Factor for Sandblasted Glass: 0.5.

3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.

4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants, in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For installers, and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-e coatings.

B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulating glass, glazing sealants, and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain all glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing."

4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

J. Preinstallation Conference:

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade. 3. Large-Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite.

4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 INSULATING GLASS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Viracon; Phone: 507-451-9555

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.

2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Articleas indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM, silicone, or, thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7

ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

4. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to

continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.8 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type GL-1: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass. a. Basis of Design: Viracon


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9

2. Make-up:

1/4" (6mm) VE1-2M #2 1/2" (13.2mm) airspace 1/4" (6mm) Clear

3. Transmittance: Visible Light: 70% Solar Energy: 32% Ultra-Violet: 10%

4. Reflectance: Visible Light-Exterior: 11% Visible Light-Interior: 12% Solar Energy: 31%

5. U-Value: NFRC Winter Conditions: 0.29 Btu/(hr x sqft x ºF) NFRC Summer Conditions: 0.26 Btu/(hr x sqft x ºF) Shading Coefficient: 0.44 Solar Factor (SHGC): 0.38 LSG (Light to Solar Gain) 1.84 Relative Heat Gain: 91 Btu/hr x sqft

B. Glass Type GL-2: Low-e-coated, translucent insulating glass. a. Basis of Design: Viracon

2. Make-up: 1/4" (6mm) VE1-2M #2 1/2" (13.2mm) airspace 1/4" (6mm) Clear w/ V-1086 simulated sandblast #3

3. Transmittance: Visible Light: 44% Solar Energy: 21% Ultra-Violet: 5%

4. Reflectance: Visible Light-Exterior: 15% Visible Light-Interior: 18% Solar Energy: 32%

5. U-Value: NFRC Winter Conditions: 0.30 Btu/(hr x sqft x ºF) NFRC Summer Conditions: 0.26 Btu/(hr x sqft x ºF) Shading Coefficient: 0.39 Solar Factor (SHGC): 0.34 Relative Heat Gain: 82 Btu/hr x sqft


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 11

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 12

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 13


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1

SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 3. Section 093000 "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for

ceramic tile.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch long length for each trim accessory indicated.


A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated.



2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part

of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."



2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch 2. Long Edges: Tapered

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to

ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. T molding:

1) 5/8” depth, ½” reveal, overall width to match existing conditions. 2) Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 T5. 3) Fry Reglet TDM 50 or equivalent product.



2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.



D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

2. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.



2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

H. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings and where required for fire-resistance-rated

assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing



member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges where indicated. 5. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prepare existing walls as required for installation of new resilient base.



C. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

E. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise

indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



TILE, MORTAR, GROUT, & WATERPROOFING 09 30 00 - 1

SECTION 09 30 00

TILE, MORTAR, GROUT, & WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the exterior and interior tile application as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Porcelain wall tile on CMU walls and cement board over stud walls.

2. Mortar and setting beds.

3. Grout.

4. Waterproofing membrane.

5. Crack isolation membrane.

6. Metal edge strips.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Unit Masonry – Section 04 20 00

B. Masonry Accessories – Drainage Mat – Section 04 05 25

C. Joint Sealants – 07 92 00 - for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

D. Gypsum Board – Section 09 29 00 – for cementitious backer units.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Comply with current editions and applicable Specifications of the following:

1. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series - American National Standards for Installation

2. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.

3. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North



America.

4. ISO 13007 - International Standards Organization; classification for Grout and

Adhesives.

5. LEED® - Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design.


A. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

D. Standards – see 1.4,A of this section.

E. The manufacturer and installer of this work must demonstrate to the Architect’s satisfaction that he has satisfactorily performed work of this type and size for a period of at least five (5) years.

F. In addition the manufacturer must show that he has experienced personnel, physical facilities, quality control procedures and a management capability sufficient to execute this particular project.

G. All work in this section shall be single source responsibility of the trade contractor.

H. Extra Stock: Furnish extra stock of quantity equal to 1% of amount installed, in full-size units, for each color, and size of tile.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

1. Shop drawings shall indicate:

a. Specified finish materials, and color.

b. Shop and field assembly details including cut and connection.

c. Joint layout and relationship to adjacent material.

B. Sample Materials

1. Submit physical samples of tile, all assorted materials herein, and sealants with finish colors as directed by the architect.

C. Product and Installation Data:



1. Tile manufacturer's product and technical data and certificates issued by the manufacturer and signed by the installer certifying compliance with applicable standards.

2. Certificates for each type of tile, issued by tile manufacturer and signed by the installer certifying that the product is manufactured per ANSI 137.1.

3. Waterproofing membrane, mortar and grout manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating suitability for the installation specified and compliance with applicable standards.

4. Sealant or prefabricated joint manufacturer's product and technical data.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL

A. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of material manufacturers for environmental conditions before, during and after installation.

B. For Interior applications:

1. Do not begin installation until building is completely enclosed and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity conditions consistent with "after occupancy" conditions for a minimum of 2 weeks.

2. Maintain continuous and uniform building temperatures of not less than 50°F during installation.

3. Ventilate spaces receiving tile in accordance with material manufacturer’s instructions.

C. For Exterior applications:

1. Build a temporary shelter and when needed use indirect auxiliary heaters to maintain an adequate temperature level in the working environment and surfaces.

2. Exhaust temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to the work or injury to personnel from carbon monoxide emissions.



3. Maintain substrate and ambient temperatures in tiled areas between 50°F and 95°F during installation and for at least 7 days after completion, unless otherwise indicated in the product instructions and/or ANSI A108 installation standards.

D. Protect adjacent surfaces during progress of the work in this section.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. The complete wall assembly is to be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of substantial completion of the work specified in this section.

PART 2. – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Material and current Tile Council of America Handbook for products and materials indicated for setting and grouting.

B. Tile shall be a product which is recommended and warrantable by the Manufacturer for the exterior wall installations as drawn and specified, in climates which experience harsh winter conditions, including multiple freeze/thaw cycles.

2.2 TILE MATERIALS:

A. Product: Dal-Tile – Colorbody Porcelain - Alta Vista

B. After firing, non-rectified sizes shall be 12”x12”. Thickness is 1/4" minimum.

C. Colors: Field Color: ‘Desert Sand’-AV50; Stripe Color: ‘Drift Wood’-AV53

D. Manufacturers: Dal-Tile Corp.

E. According to availability, provide matching trim shapes such as bullnose, jollies, corners, borders and cove base when specified and or detailed.

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS (OVER METAL STUDS):

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

2. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. 3. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.



4. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. 5. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

6. Thickness: 5/8 inch

2.4 WATERPROOF & CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE:

A. Premium Latex Based Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane; fast setting, flexible, thin, load-bearing, waterproofing membrane system consisting of a premixed, quick-drying liquid latex, for installation under ceramic tile or stone complying with ANSI A118.10 and ANSI A118.12.

1. Product: MAPEI, "AquaDefense".

2.5 DRAINAGE MAT MATERIALS:

A. Drainage Mat: Randomly oriented geometric patterned drainage and ventilation mat designed to eliminate moisture and moisture vapor in wall applications.

1. Product: Driwall Rainscreen 020-1 as manufactured by Keene Building Products.

2.6 MORTAR MATERIALS:

A. Quick-setting thin-set mortar and polymer additive; complying with ANSI A118.4 and ISO 13007 C2FS2P2.

1. Product: MAPEI “Granirapid' two-component system, of hydraulic mortar and flexible liquid polymer additive.

2.7 GROUT MATERIALS:

A. After tile setting has dried, all joints except isolation and control joints will be grouted using fast setting sanded polymer-modified grout in a color selected from the manufacturer's standard colors, complying with ANSI A118.6, ANSI A118.7 and ISO 3007 CG2WA.

1. Product: MAPEI "Ultracolor Plus". Grout joints to be 3/16” in width, or manufacturers minimum recommended width.

2.8 SEALANT MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."



B. ll sealants are to be complying with ASTM C920 according to Type, Grade, Class and Uses required.

1. Product: Dow Corning 795 or equal medium modulus silicone sealants, color matched to the grout.

2.9 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTROL, CONTRACTION, AND ISOLATION JOINTS

A. Refer to drawings and most current TCA Handbook for recommendations on locating, treating and detailing various types of construction joints.


A. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

B. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer’s standard silicone product for sealing grout joits and that does not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Product: MAPEI “KER” (003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout; 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile)

PART 3. – EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Prior to the start of erection, examine the job site for conditions which may affect the execution, performance or quality of workmanship required for the panel installation. Immediately bring to the attention of the Architect any conditions which may affect the work. Do not proceed with the work until these conditions are corrected, adjusted or otherwise controlled.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Substrate Preparation: Prepare and clean substrate in accordance with installation standards and manufacturer's instructions, and as follows:

1. Remove protrusions, bumps and ridges by grinding or chipping.

2. Repair, fill, and level cracks, holes, depressions and rough or chipped areas in substrate using patching material recommended by setting materials manufacturer.

3. Ensure that the substrate is within the following tolerances:



a. Vertical surfaces (walls) - Maximum variation in substrate shall not exceed 1/8" in ten feet from the required plane.

B. Jobsite Blending: Blend tiles before installing in accordance with reference standards to produce an even range and distribution of color and finish.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install tile in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and the applicable requirements of ANSI A108 Series for the materials being used.

B. Install tile using TCA or TTMAC methods specified on the drawings.

C. Install expansion and control joints in accordance with TCA method EJ171 Installing

D. Install tile in pattern indicated and align all joints in both the vertical and horizontal planes.

E. When possible, smooth cut edges of tile and/or use appropriate cutter or wet saw to produce smooth cuts. Provide straight cuts which align with adjacent materials.

F. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners, without disruption of pattern or joint alignment.

G. Provide tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints smooth and even, without voids, cracks, or excess mortar or grout. Maintain joints 1/8” in width, or manufacturers minimum recommended width.

H. Mix mortar in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

J. Apply setting material in accordance with manufacturer's directions and install tile before mortar has started initial cure. For thin set mortar application, use a notched trowel that will achieve the recommended coverage of mortar after tiles have been installed. Reference standard coverage information and follow manufacturer's recommendations for trowel size when using mortars.

K. Do not spread more material than can be covered within 10 to 15 minutes. If "skinning" occurs, remove mortar and spread fresh material. Spread mortar with notches running in one direction that shall be perpendicular to the pressing, pushing and pulling of tile during placement.

L. Place tile in fresh mortar, press, push and pull the tile slightly to achieve 100% coverage and contact of tile with setting material and substrate as possible. The coverage shall be sufficiently distributed to give full support of the tile. Make sure that all corners and edges are well supported with mortar. Leave no hollow corners or edges. 100% coverage is mandatory for wet or exterior areas. A skim coat (“back-butter”) of mortar can be placed onto the entire back of the tile using a trowel in order to assist in optimum adhesion and coverage of the mortar being used.



M. Ensure there is a minimum 1/8" of mortar between tile and substrate after proper bedding. Installer must periodically remove individual tiles to assure proper bond coverage consistent with industry specifications. If coverage is found to be insufficient, use a larger size notched trowel.

N. Use a beating block and hammer or rubber mallet so that faces and edges of individual tiles are flush and level with faces and edges of adjacent tiles, and to reduce lippage.

3.4 GROUTING:

A. Install grout in accordance with ANSI A108.10, correlating to grout type chosen and manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Mix grout material in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions.

C. Apply grout to produce full, smooth grout joints of uniform width, and free of voids and gaps.

D. Before grouting entire area do a test area to assure there will be no permanent staining or discoloration of the tile and to verify that the grout is easily removed from the surface. If necessary, pre-coat exposed surfaces of tile with a grout release as recommended by the manufacturer, as this will facilitate removal of the grout.

E. Cure all setting and grouting materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

1. Remove grout release and clean tile surfaces so they are free of grout residue and foreign matter, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If a grout haze or residue remains, use a suitable grout haze remover or cleaner and contact grout manufacturer for recommendations. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. Do not use harsh hydrochloric, muriatic or sulfuric acid or acid-based cleaners to clean glazed tiles or tiles grouted with latex modified grout.

2. When a heavy residue of grout is present, acceptable tile cleaning acids may be used. However, the grout should be allowed to cure a minimum of 10 days before this aggressive cleaning method is employed. Tile and grout shall be soaked with water before cleaning. In the absence of a recommendation from the grout manufacturer, acid cleaning may be done with a saturated solution of phosphoric or sulfamic acid, mixed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. After cleaning, provide protective covering and maintain conditions to protect tile work from damage or deterioration.

4. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.



3.6 REPAIR

A. Repair finishes damaged by installation so that there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be repaired to the shop, make the required alterations or provide new units at the fabricators option.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 096513 "Tile Carpeting"



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

D. Product Schedule: For resilient products.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.



1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F .

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. c. Johnsonite.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic) 2. Style: Straight (flat or toeless)

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.080 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.



F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.



1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with

installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:



1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 1

SECTION 09 68 13

TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular carpet tile.


1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and

accessories installed with carpet tile.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference:

1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

3. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For carpet and installation adhesives, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."



B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-)

long Samples.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.



1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association.

B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part

of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Comply with CRI 104.


A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.



2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: See Manufacturer’s Information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Shaw Contract Group

B. Collection: Shadows

C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range within collection.

D. Pattern: Imprint tile; Sketch Tile; Veil Tile

E. Installation Method: To be determined by Architect.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 1

SECTION 09 91 13

EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal.


1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.

2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.




A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.



3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from building site daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sherwin Williams 2. ICI Paints 3. Or other manufacturer as approved by the Architect

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.



C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.

B. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.

C. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69.

2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79.

B. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: MPI #76.

C. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

D. Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.



F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.

4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory

primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.



B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79. b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Division 05 Section where substrate

is specified. c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #161. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #163. f. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss

Level 6)[ MPI #164.

2. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal, MPI #79. b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Division 05 Section where substrate

is specified. c. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #8.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by

topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated.

c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.



INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1

SECTION 09 91 23

INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 3. Steel. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Wood. 6. Gypsum board.


1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.

2. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.

3. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.



E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.



2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2. ICI Paints 3. or other manufacturer as approved by the Architect

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards requirements: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." www.mpi.net



B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Colors:

1. All Interior surfaces will be one color: white to match existing.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: 1. Comply with MPI #4 standards for a water based, high solids, emulsion type

pigmented coating with bridging and filling properties for interior or exterior concrete masonry units, for the purpose of filling the surface for subsequent applications of paint. Application by brush, roller or airless spray. Rolling or backrolling must be done to ensure proper filling of voids.

a. ICI Paints.: ICI X-Pert b. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.: Speedhide Acrylic Block Filler c. Pratt & Lambert.: Int/Ext. Latex Block Filler d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).: PrepRite Latex Block Filler

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer Sealer, Flat, Latex, Interior:



1. Comply with MPI #50 standards for a white, pigmented, water based latex sealer used on new interior plaster, concrete and gypsum wallboard surfaces that are subsequently painted with latex or alkyd finish coat(s). Its purpose is to reduce the porosity of the substrate for finish coats. Not intended for use on wood or previously painted surfaces.

B. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: 1. Comply with MPI #3 standards for a water based, alkali resistant pigmented

primer used on alkaline surfaces such as plaster, vertical concrete and masonry surfaces. Paint systems using this coating will be primarily for new and repainting work in residential, commercial and light industrial applications. Surface preparation methods can include hand and power tool cleaning and pressure washing. Finish coatings include conventional latex and alkyd paints. Application methods include: brushes, rollers and/or airless or conventional spray equipment.

C. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: 1. Comply with MPI #149 standards for a white pigmented, water based primer

sealer with low odor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter. These products are for use on new interior plaster, concrete and on gypsum wallboard surfaces that are subsequently to be painted with latex finish coats. Not intended for wood or previously painted surfaces.

2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: 1. Comply with MPI #107 standards for a water based, emulsion type, anti-corrosive

primer for interior ferrous metals exposed to mildly corrosive environments. This coating shall be resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel. Application methods will include using brushes, rollers, and airless and conventional spray equipment.

B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: 1. Comply with MPI #134 standards for a water based metal primer, composed of

anti-corrosive pigments and acrylic resins, for cleaned/etched galvanized metal. Designed for use with water based finish coatings, on interior surfaces, in low humidity conditions. Paint systems using this primer will be specified for new and repainting work in residential, commercial and light industrial applications. Application includes use of brushes, rollers, and airless and conventional spray equipment.

2.6 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): 1. Comply with MPI #147 standards for a colored latex paint with low odor

characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter.



B. Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3): MPI #52. 1. Comply with MPI #42 standards for a colored acrylic or latex paint with low odor

characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter to be used on primed wood and metals.

2.7 Electrostatic Enamel

A. For use in dormitory bathroom storage closets (Gloss Level 5): 1. Comply with OTC standards for an electrostatically applied paint with low odor

characteristics and comply with OEPA and local VOC requirements. 2. Product shall be an industrial based urethane alkyd.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show

materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent.



C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.



I. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or

plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

J. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. List below contains items that are often field painted, plus others that are often not. Revise list to suit Project.

E. Paint the following work where exposed: 1. New Tectum Roof Decking 2. New Metal Decking 3. New Exposed Steel 4. New Electrical Conduit 5. New Gypsum Board 6. New Door Frame 7. New Masonry Block




A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with

paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.



INTERIOR GLASS PARTITION SYSTEMS 10 66 00 - 1

SECTION 10 66 00

INTERIOR GLASS PARTITION SYSTEMS

This section is included in Alternate No. 1

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Free standing glass partition system.

B. Glass doors and door hardware.


A. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

B. ASTM A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

C. ASTM B 221-06 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

D. ASTM C 864-05 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.

E. ASTM C 1036-06 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.

F. ASTM C 1048-04 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT, Coated and Uncoated Glass.

G. ASTM C 1115-06 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories.

H. ASTM C 1172-03 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.

I. AAMA 611-98 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

J. AAMA 2603-02 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.

K. AAMA 2604-05 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.

L. ANSI A156.1 - Standard for Butts and Hinges'



M. ANSI A156.4 - Standard for Architectural Door Trim.

1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Requirements: Design glass partition system to withstand live loads in accordance with applicable Building Code with maximum L/120 deflection.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide tempered or laminated safety glass for locations subject to human impact as required by the applicable Building Code.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and details showing type and thickness of metal and glass, glazing, anchoring, and joining, hardware, trim, and accessories.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 12 inches (305 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Glass partition manufacturer to have minimum five years documented experience in the fabrication of glass partitions of the type required for this project and be capable of providing field service representation during installation.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years documented experience in work of this Section and approved by partition system manufacturer.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect materials from damage and exposure to moisture.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent



interruption of construction progress.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Field Measurements: Verify opening dimensions of all-glass partitions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate the measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent surfaces to avoid damage to installed materials.

B. Coordinate work with adjacent floor, wall, and ceiling construction to accommodate frame anchorage, track, and concealed hardware.

C. Coordinate work with concrete floors and floor finishes for adequate tolerances and clearances between panels and floor finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Avanti Systems USA, which is located at: 200 William St. Suite 306 ; Port Chester, NY 10573; Toll Free Tel: 877-282-6843; Tel: 914-934-9093; Web: www.avantisystemsusa.com

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 FREESTANDING GLASS PARTITION SYSTEM

A. Elite Freestanding relocatable, dry glazed partition system as manufactured by Avanti Systems USA. Aluminum-framed or frameless glass can be specified as part of this section. 1. Configuration:

a. As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Single Glazed.

a. As required 3/8 or 1/2 inch clear tempered glass. 3. Bottom Track:

a. Extruded 1 inch (25 mm) aluminum, 2 piece glazing channels with brush seals.

b. Setting blocks provided as required. c. Glazing gaskets molded or extruded shape to fit glazing channel

retaining slot. d. Provide end covers or channel end caps as required.

4. Vertical Wall Trim: a. Wall/Aluminum: Extruded aluminum 1 inch (25 mm) face size, 2 piece



frame with brush seals for glazing joints. 5. Glass Joints:

a. Vertical Joints: 1) Translucent H sections.

b. Corner Joints: 1) Extruded aluminum 90 degree junction sections with brush seals.

6. Doorframes: a. Extruded aluminum slimline door frame with brush seal door seals.

2.3 GLASS PARTITION DOORS

A. Pivoted Doors: 1. Eclipse frameless surface mounted pivoted glass doors with tempered glass

of minimum thickness matching glass partition. 2. Hardware

a. Tubular Pull: Stainless steel with a brushed finish, 48 inches (1219 mm) long 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter.

b. Pivots: Patch type with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1, compact design floor-concealed door pivot and closer with 90 degree hold open check. 1) Adjustable spring power allows the necessary adjustment. 2) Controlled closing with two independent valves. 3) Non-handed. 4) Brushed stainless steel finish.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: 1. ASTM B 221, 6063-T6 alloy and temper. 2. Recycled content: Minimum 75 percent, with minimum 40 percent classified as

post consumer.

B. Stainless Steel Fittings: Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 276.

C. Glass: 1. Clear tempered glass: ASTM C 1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear,

Quality q3 glazing select, Kind FT fully tempered, thickness specified.

D. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C 864, neoprene or EPDM, or ASTM C 1115, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, molded or extruded shape to fit glazing channel retaining slot.

E. Fasteners: Type best suited to application.

F. Door Hardware: Specified in Section 08710.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Aluminum: AAMA 2604, polyester powder coating stock color RAL 9006 metallic silver.

B. Aluminum: AAMA 2604, polyester powder coating custom color as selected by the Architect selected from manufacturer's full color range.



C. Stainless Steel Fittings: Satin finish.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Accurately fit and secure joints and intersections.

B. Make joints flush and hairline.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices and hardware. Fabricate anchorage items.

D. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work of this section.

C. Verify concealed overhead structural supports are sized and located properly.

D. Insure finished floor under operable glass partition is level plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) non-cumulative.

E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach assembly to structure.

C. Install components plumb and level, in proper plane, free from warp and twist.

D. Install glass and accessories in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual.

E. Installation Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from plumb or level: 1/8 inch in 3 feet or 1/4 inch in any 10

feet, whichever is less. 2. Maximum misalignment of members abutting end to end: 1/16 inch.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for smooth operation throughout full operating range.

3.5 PROTECTION



A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After installation and adjusting clean metal and glass surfaces to remove dust, loose fibers, fingerprints, adhesives, and other foreign materials.



ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR 14 21 00 - 1

SECTION 14 21 00

ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Electric Traction Elevator. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under this Section: 1. Hoist Beam 2. Pit Ladder C. Work Supplied Under Other Sections:

1. Temporary lighting, including temporary lighting in hoistway for machine space

with switch located in hoistway on the strike jamb side of top landing door.

2. Hoistway ventilation shall be in accordance with local and national building code

requirements.

3. Guide Rail Support shall be structurally adequate to extend from pit floor to top

of hoistway, with spans in accordance with requirements of authority having ju-risdiction and final layouts.

4. Removable barricades at all hoistway openings, in compliance with OSHA 29

CFR 1926.502 in addition to any local code requirements.

5. Lifeline attachments capable of withstanding 5000 lb load in accordance with

OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502. Provide a minimum of 2 at the top, front of each hoistway.

6. Pit lighting: Fixture with switch and guards. Provide illumination level equal to or

greater than that required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 2000, or applicable version.

7. Control space lighting with switch. Coordinate switch with lighting for machine

space as allowable by code.

8. Access Doors: As required for access to governor. Access door shall be self-

closing, self-locking if necessary and operable from the inside without a key. D. Related sections: 1. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls 2. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: 3. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry 4. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications 5. Section 071600 - Cementitious Waterproofing 6. Section 230000 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (Specs on Drawings) 7. Section 260000 – Electrical (Specs on Drawings)

8. Section 263000 - Electric Power Generating and Storing Equipment (Specs on

Drawings) 9. Section 273000 - Voice Communications (Specs on Drawings) 10. Section 283100 - Fire Detection and Alarm (Specs on Drawings) 11. Section 312000 – Earth Moving



E. Industry and government standards: 1. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2. ADAAG - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 3. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code 4. ANSI/NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows 5. ASME/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ELEVATOR A. Elevator Equipment: KONE EcoSpace gearless traction elevator B. Equipment Control: KCM831 C. Quantity of Elevators: 1 D. Landings: 4 E. Openings: 3 Front Openings, 1 Back Openings F. Travel: 19'-6.75"+/- (all 4 levels are existing and must be verified in field) G. Rated Capacity: 4000 lbs (1814 kg) Service shape H. Rated Speed: 150 fpm I. Clear Inside Dimensions (W x D): 5'-6 3/16" x 7'-7 7/16" J. Cab Height: 8' K. Clear height under suspended ceiling: 7'-7" L. Entrance Width & Type: 4' & Front/Back Left Opening M. Entrance Height: 7' N. Main Power Supply: 480 or 208 Volts + 5%, three-phase O. Operation: Simplex P. Machine Location: Inside the hoistway mounted on car guide rail Q. Control Space Location: Remote room in the existing lower floor mechanical room R. Elevator Equipment shall conform to the requirements of seismic zone: Non-Seismic S. Maintenance Service Period: 12 Months 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Car Performance 1. Car Speed ± 5% of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of



travel. 2. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold (per code) up to 125% of rated load. B. System Performance 1. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 25 mg 2. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 25 mg 3. Jerk Rate (maximum): 1.3 ft/sec3 4. Acceleration (maximum) 1.3 ft/sec2 5. In Car Noise: = 55 dB(A) 6. Leveling Accuracy: ±0.2 inches 7. Starts per hour (maximum): 120 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for each proposed system. 1. Cab design, dimensions and layout. 2. Layout, finishes, and accessories and available options. 3. Controls, signals and operating system. 4. Color selection charts for cab and entrances. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Clearances and travel of car. 2. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions. 3. Location and layout of equipment and signals. 4. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway. 5. Maximum rail bracket spacing. 6. Maximum loads imposed on building structure. 7. Hoist beam requirements. 8. Location and sizes of access doors. 9. Location and details of hoistway door and frames. 10. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Operation and maintenance data: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard maintenance and operation manual. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Minimum of ten years experience in the fabrication, installation and

service of elevators of the type and performance of the specified. The manufacturer shall have a documented quality assurance program.

B. Installer: The equipment manufacturer shall install the elevator.

C. Inspection and Testing: In accordance with requirements of local jurisdiction, obtain

required permits, inspections and tests. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. If the construction site is not prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the

agreed ship date, the General Contractor shall be responsible to provide a safe, dry, and easily accessible storage area on or off the premises. Additional lablor costs for



double handling will be the responsibility of the general contractor.

B. Delivered elevator materials shall be stored in a protected environment in accordance

with manufacturer recommendations. A minimum storage area of 10 feet by 20 feet is required adjacent to the hoistway.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer warranty for a period of one year. The warranty period is to be-gin upon Substantial Completion of the Contract. Warranty covers defects in mate-rials and workmanship. Damage due to ordinary use, vandalism, improper or insuffi-cient maintenance, misuse, or neglect do not constitute defective material or work-manship.

1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. The elevator manufacturer shall provide maintenance service consisting of regular examinations and adjustments of the elevator equipment for a period of 12 Months after date of substantial completion. Replacement parts shall be produced by the original equipment manufacturer.

B. Maintenance service be performed during regular working hours of regular working

days and shall include regular time call back service.

C. Maintenance service shall not include adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts

due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Provide AC gearless machine room-less elevator systems subject to compliance with

the design and performance requirements of this specification. Elevator manufactur-ers may include but are not limited to one of the following:

1. Basis of Design: EcoSpace™ traction elevators by KONE, Inc. (www.kone.com). 2. Other acceptable machine room-less products: a. Otis Elevator Co. - Gen2™ Product b. Schindler Elevator Corp. - 400A Product 2.02 EQUIPMENT: CONTROL COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SPACE

A. Controller: Provide microcomputer based control system to perform all of the func-

tions.

1. All high voltage (110V or above) contact points inside the controller cabinet shall

be protected from accidental contact in a situation where the controller doors are open.

2. Controller shall be separated into two distinct halves; Motor Drive side and Con-

trol side. High voltage motor power conductors shall be routed and physically segregated from the rest of the controller.

3. Provide a serial cardrack and main CPU board containing a non-erasable

EPROM and operating system firmware.



4. Variable field parameters and adjustments shall be contained in a non-volatile

memory module.

B. Drive: Provide Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC drive system to develop high

starting torque with low starting current.

C. Controller Location: Within 100'-0" (30.48m) Controller(s) shall be located in a remote

cabinet or room within 140''-0" (42.6 m) wire feet of the elevator machine. 2.03 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY COMPONENTS

A. Machine: AC gearless machine, with permanent magnet synchronous motor, direct

current electro-mechanical disc brakes and integral traction drive sheave, mounted to the car guide rail at the top of the hoistway.

B. Governor: Friction type over-speed governor rated for the duty of the elevator speci-

fied. C. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Polyurethane buffer. D. Hoistway Operating Devices: 1. Emergency stop switch in the pit 2. Terminal stopping switches. 3. Emergency stop switch on the machine E. Positioning System: System consisting of magnets and proximity switches. F. Guide Rails and Attachments: Steel rails with brackets and fasteners. 2.04 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Entrances 1. Sills: extruded. 2. Doors: Hollow metal construction with vertical internal channel reinforcements. 3. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire-rated for 1-1/2 hour. 4. Entrance Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel.

5. Entrance Markings Jamb Plates: Provide standard entrance jamb tactile mark-

ings on both jambs, at all floors. Plate Mounting: Refer to manufacturer draw-ings.

2.05 EQUIPMENT: CAR COMPONENTS

A. Car Frame: Provide car frame with adequate bracing to support the platform and car

enclosure. B. Platform: Platform shall be per manufacturers standard.

C. Car Guides: Provide guide-shoes mounted to top and bottom of both car and coun-terweight frame. Each guide-shoe assembly shall be arranged to maintain constant contact on the rail surfaces. Provide retainers in areas with Seismic design require-ments.



D. Load weighing device shall be strain gauge type mounted to dead-end hitch attached

atop the hoistway guide-rail. E. Steel Cab (Laminate Series)

1. Panels: Non-removable vertical panels, plastic laminate selected from standard

manufacturer's catalog of choices. 2. Car Front Finish: Brushed stainless steel. 3. Car Door Finish: Brushed stainless steel. 4. Ceiling:

a. Round LED Down Light Drop Ceiling - LF-88: Satin Finished Stainless

Steel three panel suspended ceiling with three holes per panel for Round LED lights.

5. Handrail:

a. 2” Round - satin stainless steel. Rails to be located on two Side Walls of car

enclosure. 6. Flooring: By others. (Will be carpet) 7. Threshold: Aluminum

8. Protective pad hooks and quilted fire retardant protective pads: Pad to be hung

from suspended ceiling F. Emergency Car Signals

1. Emergency Siren: Siren mounted on top of cab that is activated when the alarm button in the car operating panel is engaged. Siren shall have rated sound pres-sure level of 80 dB(A) at a distance of three feet from device. Siren shall re-spond with a delay of not more than one second after activation of alarm button.

2. Emergency Car Lighting: Provide emergency power unit employing a 12-volt

sealed rechargeable battery and totally static circuits shall illuminate the elevator car and provide current to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure.

3. Emergency Exit Contact: An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top

exit. G. Ventilation: No fan. 2.06 EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES

A. Car Operating Panel: Provide car operating panel with all push buttons, key switches,

and message indicators for elevator operation.

1. Full height car operating panel shall contain a bank of round, mechanical, illumi-nated buttons marked to correspond to landings served, emergency call button, door open button, door close button, and key switches for lights, inspection, and exhaust fan. Buttons have white illumination (halo). All buttons to have raised text and Braille marking on left hand side. The car operating display panel shall be white Dot Matrix. All texts, when illuminated, shall be white. The full height car operating panel shall have a polycarbonate face plate that is shatterproof and impact resistant in a color and pattern per manufacturers standard selec-tion.

2. Additional features of car operating panel shall include: a. Car Position Indicator within operating panel (white).

b. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number on car

top.



c. Help buttons with raised markings. d. In car stop switch per local code. e. Firefighter's hat. f. Firefighter's Phase II Key-switch. g. Call Cancel Button.

h. Pre-programmed integrated ADA phone (complete description of krms fea-

tures included as standard)

i. Help Button/Communicator. Activation of help button will initiate two-way communication between car and a location inside the building, switching over to alternate location if call is unanswered, where personnel are availa-ble to take the appropriate action. Visual indicators are provided for call init-iation and call acknowledgement.

j. Firefighter's Phase II emergency in-car operating instructions.

B. Hall Fixtures: Wall mounted hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push but-tons and key switches for elevator operation. Wall mounted hall fixtures shall have a polycarbonate face plate that is shatterproof and impact resistant in a color per manufacturers standard selection.

1. Hall fixtures shall feature round, mechanical, buttons in applied mount face frame. Hall fixtures shall correspond to options available from that landing. But-tons shall be in a vertically mounted fixture. Hall fixtures shall not be jamb-mounted. Hall lanterns shall feature white illumination.

C. Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be pro-vided in the car entrance. When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shall indicate the direction in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound. The chime will sound once for up and twice for down.

2.07 EQUIPMENT: ELEVATOR OPERATION AND CONTROLLER A. Elevator Operation

1. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, opera-

tion shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in the system have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served.

2. Zoned Car Parking. 3. Relative System Response Dispatching. B. Standard Operating Features to include: 1. Full Collective Operation 2. Fan and Light Control. 3. Load Weighing Bypass. 4. Ascending Car Uncontrolled Movement Protection 5. Top of Car Inspection Station. C. Additional Operating Features to include:

1. Emergency Battery Power Supply No generator is present. When the main line power is lost for longer than 5 seconds the emergency battery power supply provides power automatically to the elevator controller. The elevator will lower to the ground floor landing, open the doors, and shut down. The elevator will return to service upon the return of



normal main line power. An auxiliary contact on the main line disconnect and shunt trip breaker ( if used ) will be provided by others.

D. Elevator Control System for Inspections and Emergency 1. Provide devices within controller to run the elevator in inspection operation. 2. Provide devices on car top to run the elevator in inspection operation.

3. Provide within controller an emergency stop switch to disconnect power from the

brake and prevents motor from running.

4. Provide the means from the controller to Electronically lift (from Control Closet)

and control the elevator brake to safely bring car to nearest available landing when power is interrupted.

5. Provide the means from the controller to reset the governor over speed switch

and also trip the governor.

6. Provide the means from the controller to reset the emergency brake when set

because of an unintended car movement or ascending car over speed. 7. Provide the means for the control to reset elevator earthquake operation. 2.08 EQUIPMENT: DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROL

A. Door Operator: A closed loop permanent magnet VVVF high-performance door oper-ator shall be provided to open and close the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movement shall be cushioned at both limits of travel. Electro-mechanical inter-lock shall be provided at each hoistway entrance to prevent operation of the elevator unless all doors are closed and locked. An electric contact shall be provided on the car at each car entrance to prevent the operation of the elevator unless the car door is closed.

B. The door operator shall be arranged so that, in case of interruption or failure of elec-tric power, the doors can be readily opened by hand from within the car, in accor-dance with applicable code. Emergency devices and keys for opening doors from the landing shall be provided as required by local code.

C. Doors shall open automatically when the car has arrived at or is leveling at the re-spective landings. Doors shall close after a predetermined time interval or immediate-ly upon pressing of a car button. A door open button shall be provided in the car. Momentary pressing of this button shall reopen the doors and reset the time interval.

D. Door hangers and tracks shall be provided for each car and hoistway door. Tracks shall be contoured to match the hanger sheaves. The hangers shall be designed for power operation with provisions for vertical and lateral adjustment. Hanger sheaves shall have polyurethane tires and pre-lubricated sealed-for-life bearings.

E. Electronic Door Safety Device. The elevator car shall be equipped with an electronic protective device extending the full height of the car. When activated, this sensor shall prevent the doors from closing or cause them to stop and reopen if they are in the process of closing. The doors shall remain open as long as the flow of traffic con-tinues and shall close shortly after the last person passes through the door opening.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Field measure and examine substrates, supports, and other conditions under which

elevator work is to be performed. B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

C. Prior to start of Work, verify hoistway is in accordance with shop drawings. Dimen-

sional tolerance of hoistway from shop drawings: -0 inches +2 inches. Do not begin work of this section until dimensions are within tolerances.

D. Prior to start of Work, verify projections greater then 2 inches (4 inches if ASME

A17.1/CSA B44 2000 applies) must be beveled not less then 75 degrees from hori-zontal.

E. Prior to start of Work, verify landings have been prepared for entrance sill installation.

Traditional sill angle or concrete sill support shall not be required.

F. Prior to start of Work, verify elevator pit has been constructed in accordance with re-quirements, is dry and reinforced to sustain vertical forces, as indicated in approved submittal. Verify that sumps or sump pumps located within pit will not interfere with installed elevator equipment.

G. Prior to start of Work, verify control space has been constructed in accordance with

requirements, with access coordinated with elevator shop drawings, including Sleeves and penetrations.

H. Verify installation of GFCI protected 20-amp in pit and adjacent to each signal control

cabinet in control space. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchors, bearing plates, brackets and other related acces-

sories. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment, guides, controls, car and accessories in accordance with manufac-

turer installation methods and recommended practices.

B. Properly locate guide rails and related supports at locations in accordance with man-

ufacturer’s recommendations and approved shop drawings. Anchor to building struc-ture using isolation system to minimize transmission of vibration to structure.

C. All hoistway frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoist-

way. Coordinate installation of sills and frames with other trades.

D. Lubricate operating system components in accordance with manufacturer recom-

mendations. E. Perform final adjustments, and necessary service prior to substantial completion.



3.04 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work:

1. Guide rail brackets attached to steel shall be installed prior to application of fire-

proofing.

2. Coordinate construction of entrance walls with installation of door frames and

sills. Maintain front wall opening until elevator equipment has been installed. a. Ensure adequate support for entrance attachment points at all landings.

b. Coordinate wall openings for hall push buttons, signal fixtures and sleeves.

Each elevator requires sleeves within the hoistway wall.

c. Coordinate emergency power transfer switch and power change pending

signals as required for termination at the primary elevator signal control cabinet in each group.

d. Coordinate interface of elevators and fire alarm system. e. Coordinate interface of dedicated telephone line. 3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

A. Perform recommended and required testing in accordance with authority having ju-

risdiction. B. Obtain required permits and provide originals to Owner’s Representative. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Prior to substantial completion, instruct Owner’s Representative on the proper func-tion and required daily maintenance of elevators. Instruct personnel on emergency procedures.


PROJECT MANUAL SPECIFICATIONS€¦ · Messiah Lutheran Elevator Addition July 01, 2011 Issued For...

Documents

Transcript of PROJECT MANUAL SPECIFICATIONS€¦ · Messiah Lutheran Elevator Addition July 01, 2011 Issued For...